Home
        User Manual - Cusick Communications, Inc.
         Contents
1.                                                                           To set LCS on  e Press LCS button             gt  To cancel LCS     Enter the password  Press LCS button   y i y  Handsfree Mode Private Mode  SE  gt  During a conversation  amp         gt       Alert Tone      Call Waiting Tone  l    To monitor   To monitor To stop the alert tone  i  1 Press SP PHONE  i Lift the handset  Press the LCS cancel   No operation  Hang up MONITOR  or   button     LCS button   To stop monitoring To answer the call To stop monitoring  Press FLASH or Press the LCS or Lift the handset  Press FLASH or Hang up   FLASH RCL or the the SP PHONE   FLASH RCL or the i  LCS Cancel button  button    LCS Cancel button                               e    To hold the current call  press the HOLD button   To return to the held call  press the CO button whose indicator light flashes green slowly   e The shaded areas are for the Handsfree operation     Setting the password    PT      passwor     r 4  wo    E   p _  Pan  7  o    o  password password i wy  cba    Lift the handset or press Dial 799  Enter the 3 digit password Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR   000 through 999  twice  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR         lt PT Display Example gt        Password  XXX                password       Note  In order to change the password  cancel the current password and then set a new password     200 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling the pass
2.                         Operating sequence  1  To answer the call  go off hook     2  Press the LOG  S2  button to log the  information  Or press the INFO  S1  button  repeatedly to see the information in detail     316    KX T7436   KX T7235   While receiving an incoming outside call  the  display shows the caller   s telephone number and  name           0111111111   JOHN WHITE    4  Extension STA Speed  Features SYS Speed  Call Log                                                                                        To answer  go off hook        gt           0111111111  JOHN WHITE  Extension STA Speed                                        Features SYS Speed  Call Log  INFO LOG    dh CA2 E a a     To see the call                                        To record the    duration time information       Note      Pressing the SHIFT button before answering a  call provides you with more information about  the caller  outside line number and or name    e You can select either the initial display  Caller  ID or outside line name  by Station  Programming    e After going off hook  you can press the SHIFT  button to change the bottom line on the display       CONT EFA ACCNT          as follows        User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Confirming and calling back  When the SHIFT indicator is red  there are calls logged   KX T7433   KX T7230    Second Display    Ll  O32 OOP           To return to    SHIFT                                                  
3.                   SHIFT WED Jan   the initial  OLD7 NEWS5 display Once  KX 17230  f i Twice  KX T7433  To see the confirmed To see the unconfirmed  information information  Sequence number 01 011111111 To modify the phone number    01 30  and caller s press  X  to erase and  0 through  number is displayed  i 9  to add numbers from the first  cr N  Pressing the INFO  S1  button To see the  provides you with further other caller s  information  information         once  sequence number  01 30    caller s name    twice  date time number of times  called  15 times max      three times  outside line number   outside line name             To call back  go off hook     E    0570011223344  CALL    CA La   tl       User Manual 317    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Operating sequence Note  1  Press the SHIFT button     To delete the displayed number  press the CLR    2  Press the OLD  S1  or NEW  S2  button to see  S2  button   the confirmed or unconfirmed information     The PREV  S3  and EXIT  S1  button appears    3  Press the NEXT  S3  or PREV  S3  buttonto      Y Pressing the SHIFT button while  cae   confirming  The EXIT  S1  button is used to  see other caller   s information  Or press the    INFO  S1  button repeatedly to see the eet the at display  information in detail  Or modify the number   if required    4  To call back  go off hook and then press the  CALL  S1  button     When a new call is logged  the display changes  to the second display automaticall
4.              Conditions     To answer the page  refer to 4 3 66 Paging     ANSWER      The paged extension users hear a confirmation tone before the voice announcement     e A confirmation tone from external pagers  External Pager Confirmation Tone  is audible at  the paged side  before the voice announcement  Eliminating the tone is programmable     e A confirmation tone is sent to extension before making the voice announcement   Eliminating the tone is programmable by System Programming      lt PT gt      To deny receiving the page  refer to 4 3 67 Paging     Deny  PT only         With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute  Paging   feature using the display operation     Programming Guide References   602  Extension Group Assignment   805  External Pager Confirmation Tone   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 66 Paging     ANSWER  4 3 67 Paging     Deny  PT only   4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    234 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Paging     All  Allows you to make a voice announcement to all extensions  Your message is announced over  the built in speakers of the proprietary telephones  PT  and external pagers     Any Telephone     3 3   x     O    PSN a    Lift the handset Dial 32   or 33 X  Confirmation tone Announce  Wait for  or press  Optional  an answer   SP PHONE MON
5.            4 4 5 Live Call Screening Password Control   The Manager and the Operators can clear the Live Call Screening password of any extension     Programming      KEKE KEES    Press PROGRAM  Dial 99  Dial 03     e You are in the Station  lt PT Display Example gt   Programming mode    lt PT Display Example gt  EXT No    gt                       PT   PGM Mode             AUTO DIAL PROGRAM    CGE Ci  STORE    Dial the extension number or    Press STORE  Press PROGRAM or lift the      extension number to clear one extension handset to exit the Station      x    to clear all extensions Programming mode      lt PT Display Example gt  e The STORE indicator lights        1234 Cancel                 Conditions       Ifthe extension user forgets their pre set password  they can ask the Manager or an Operator  to clear the password     User Manual References  4 3 53 Live Call Screening  LCS   PT only             Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice  Processing System  one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100      290 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 4 6 Outgoing Message  OGM       The Manager and the Operators can record and play back outgoing voice messages     The following three types of outgoing messages can be recorded     DISA message    This message is played when an outside caller accesses the system via DISA line  There are 
6.           3  Hotel Application    The display message for the Hotel Application appears only when it is enabled in system  programming     326 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Programming Guide References      001  System Speed Dialing Number Set      002  System Speed Dialing Name Set      003  Extension Number Set      004  Extension Name Set      012  ISDN Extension Number Set      013  ISDN Extension Name Set      134  Hotel Application    User Manual References       2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  K X T7235 KX T743 1 KX   T7433 KX T7436 only     e 3 2 2  001  System Speed Dialing Number Set  e 3 2 3  002  System Speed Dialing Name Set      3 2 4  003  Extension Number Set   e 3 2 5  004  Extension Name Set    User Manual 327    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory    You can make a call using the call directory by pressing the desired button which is  corresponding to the display message  The example operations are shown below     Initial Display    WED Jan  1 03 00P                            Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing  Makes an intercom call Extension STA Speed Makes a call to a party  using the directory  Features SYS Speed stored in your phone   Call Log   CONT RING BGM                                                                                                  lt Example gt   lt Example gt   To select Beth To select Panasonic  SS  SS   
7.          User Manual 265    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           266    Checking the setting time    Display PT    S    Q Eee  Bae    Lift the handset or press Dial 762  Dial tone Hang up or press    SP PHONE        SP PHONE     e If  10 10 AM  has been set    lt PT Display Example gt        Alarm 10 10AM     one time          or    10 10AM     daily                            Stopping the alarm    PT and SLT    Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR     e Pressing any key also stops the alarm  PT only         Conditions    System Time  The system clock must be set before the alarm is set     If you are connected to a KX TD1232 System  Timed Reminder message can be recorded  by the Manager or an Operator    Outgoing Message  OGM     When the alarm is heard   you can hear the message by going off hook  if it has been recorded  You hear an  intermittent tone  dial tone 3  instead of the message in the following cases     a  A DISA Card is not equipped   b  All DISA ports are busy or OUS  Out of Service    c  The Timed Reminder message has not been stored     If other extension user calls your extension when the alarm is sounding  he or she will hear  a busy tone     If you receive an incoming call during the alarm  the ringing starts after the alarm stops     If you are having a conversation at the time the alarm is set to sound  the alarm starts after  the conversation     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Station Message Deta
8.         Conditions       Executive Busy Override Deny  Extension users can prevent this function from being executed by another extension user   e Class of Service  Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature      The pre assigned extension users can interrupt an existing outside call even if access to that  line is not allowed by System Programming      This feature does not work if Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security is set at  the extension engaged in the existing outside call   e Confirmation tone  When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call and vice versa  a confirmation tone is sent  to all three parties  This tone can be eliminated by System Programming     User Manual 185    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Programming Guide References   505  Executive Busy Override   601  Class of Service   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 32 Conference  4 3 35 Data Line Security  4 3 44 Executive Busy Override Deny    186    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 44 Executive Busy Override Deny    Allows you to prevent other extension users from interrupting your telephone conversation     Any Telephone    a  KAEN EN  E E E    Lift the handset or press To set  Dial 7331  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  To cancel  Dial 7330  and dial tone           lt PT Display Example gt     y  ol 3 e When setting     Busy Ovrde Deny          Hang up or pr
9.         Conditions       If you do not answer the recall ringing within 10 seconds  four callback ring signals   this  feature will be automatically canceled        Ifthe called party becomes busy again after the callback ringing starts  the ringing stops but  this feature will be executed again when the extension becomes free        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can set and cancel this  feature using the display operation      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    110 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 6 Background Music  BGM   PT only     You can hear background music through the built in speaker of your PT  An external music  source  such as a radio  must be connected  The music stops whenever a call comes in or when  you go off hook     Setting   Canceling  7230   7235   7433   7436    When the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off     BGM    BZ  3  Press BGM  S3         To turn off the BGM   press this button again     When the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE MONITOR button is off     EE      The display shows either one of the following for five seconds  depending on whether BGM is on or off    lt PT Display Example gt     BGM On BGM Off                                     Con
10.         x  LIXIN JSA   gt  X  RY       N oe yA PAUSE Button    R  gt    CW SS   gt  SY  S WU TRANSFER Button  MESSAGE Button    A S 4 AUTO DIAL STORE Button      jis  RINGER Vol Sel   Ms   fa Used to le AA   EDIAL Button AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button   OLD Button FLASH RCL Button   P PHONE Button Jog Dial   og Dia    Microphone    User Manual    DPT Overview                 KX T7431  Display  Liquid Crystal Display   With 16 character 1 line readout   Flexible CO Buttons Shows the date  time  dialed number or name    Outside lines 01 through 12  call duration time  etc  In Programming mode   it shows the programming messages   PROGRAM Button  SELECT Button  FWD DND Button    MODE Button  CONF Button  INTERCOM Button  Y S D 4  WE Sy  W O  N  S Se MESSAGE Button    S  GF GS AUTO DIAL STORE Button  US y  AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button  REDIAL Button  A  FLASH RCL Button  HOLD Button  Jog Dial    SP PHONE Button    Microphone    User Manual 17    DPT Overview          KX T7433  Display  Liquid Crystal Display   With 16 character 3 line readout   Flexible CO Buttons Shows the date  time  dialed number or   Outside lines 01 through 24  name  call duration time  etc  In             Programming mode  it shows the  PROGRAM Button Cr programming messages     Soft Buttons  FWD DND Button O P DN  S1 through  3     SHIFT Button  NX  A    CONF Button NK  P QST ME  INTERCOM Button y 2    AS AX  os oS   SA    EDIAL Button DS    OLD Button    FLASH RCL Button    Jog Dial  P PHONE Button    Microphone    T
11.        4 3 16 Call Hold    Allows you to place an intercom or outside call on hold  While the call is on hold  you can make    and receive other calls     To place a call on hold    During a conversation     HOLD    Press HOLD  Confirmation tone    and dial tone    e You may replace the handset       The corresponding CO or INTERCOM  indicator light flashes green slowly     Retrieving a call on hold    At the holding extension      CO  INTERCOM  or    Press CO or INTERCOM which  is flashing green slowly     e The CO or INTERCOM indicator light  turns steady green     Conditions       During a conversation     Ls  o   Pe    Flash the hookswitch  Dial 50     Confirmation tone  and dial tone    e You may replace the handset     At the holding extension     FON  5 o     Lift the handset  Dial 50           To retrieve a call on hold at another extension  refer to 4 3 18 Call Hold Retrieve        Music on Hold     Music on Hold  is sent to the party on hold  if available     e What if a call on hold is not retrieved   Ifa call on hold is not retrieved in a specified period of time  default  60 s   Hold Recall  if  the extension on hook  or Hold Warning tone  if engaged in another call  rings the  extension where the call is held  Refer to 6 1 3 Tone List for details about Tone Patterns     128    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           e Automatic Disconnection  If a call  outside  extension  placed on hold is not retrieved within 30 minutes  it is  automat
12.        KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436  Display   Tilt up  Tilt up   16 char  line    p  None None   16 char  line    24 char  line   1 line LCD      3 line LCD 6 line LCD  Soft Buttons 3 Soft Buttons   and None None None 3 Soft Buttons   10 Function  Function Buttons Buttons  Jog Dial Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes  CO Buttons 12 24 12 24 24  Fixed Feat  rere Refer to the  Fixed Buttons  in 1 1 4 Feature Buttons  Buttons  KX T7200 Series  KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250  Displ Tilt up   REI 16char line     None   24 char  line  None  2 line LCD    6 line LCD  Soft Buttons 3 Soft Buttons   and None 3 Soft Buttons   10 Function None  Function Buttons Buttons  Speakerphone Yes Yes Yes Monitor only  CO Buttons 24 24 12 6  Fixed Feat  amare Refer to the  Fixed Buttons  in 1 1 4 Feature Buttons  Buttons                14 User Manual    DPT Overview       1 1 2 Location of Controls           KX T7420  Flexible CO Buttons  PROGRAM Button  Outside lines 01 through 12   FWD DND Button   Raso   CONF Button        ES A   INTERCOM Button An ZAN   IES X S   KX X   SSS 3  gt         X X j   S 7 PAUSE Button  H  amp  2    amp  Wy   lt 5  TRANSFER Button    Used to adjust the ringer volume     Cask     CG  lt  lt GO AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button    REDIAL Button   HOLD Button FLASH RCL Button   SP PHONE Button Jog Dial  Microphone    User Manual    DPT Overview           KX T7425  Flexible CO Buttons  PROGRAM Button  Outside lines 01 through 24   FWD DND Button  CONF Button  INTERCOM Button 
13.        lt SLT gt     e Ifanother user tries to access an outside line from a looked extension  the user hears a  reorder tone        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     User Manual References  4 4 7 Remote Station Lock Control  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 181    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 41 Emergency Call    Allows you to dial out a pre assigned emergency number after seizing an outside line  regardless of the restrictions imposed on your extension  Up to 10 emergency dial numbers can  be stored in the system     Dialing    Any Telephone    N     F  ran    Lift the handset or press Dial the line access code Dial tone Dial the emergency number   SP PHONE MONITOR   9 or 81 through 88      e You may press a CO button instead        Conditions       The emergency number  911  is already stored at the factory  System Programming is  required to store other emergency numbers     e An emergency call is allowed even in the following cases       in Account Code     Verified  All Calls  Toll Restriction Override  mode      in any toll restriction level      in Electronic Station Lockout   Remote Station Lock       If your telephone is connected to a host PBX  you must dial the host PBX line access code  after dialing the line access code and it must be i
14.       EXT XXXX  CLR      xxxx extension number              e To erase an incorrect entry  press the CLR  S2  button or  the TRANSFER  CLEAR  button    The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the  Station Programming mode          Paired telephone     AUTO DIAL  STORE    Press STORE     The STORE indicator lights   The display shows the initial  programming mode         To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     358    User Manual    DSS Console Features          5 2 3 One Touch Dialing Assignment    You can assign a DSS or PF button as a One Touch Dialing button  The number can be an   extension number or a telephone number  Up to 16 digits can be stored into each memory   location        Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9    PT and DSS Console     DSS Console   Paired telephone   Paired telephone   Paired telephone      DSS   PF  7 AUTO DIAL  Hee bean       STORE    Press the desired Enter the desired number Press STORE   DSS or PF button   extension number  phone  number  etc        lt PT Display Example gt     The STORE indicator lights        e The display shows the initial    rogramming mode   CLR aes g             e Up to 16 digits can be stored    e When you assign an outside phone number  you must enter a  line access code first    e To erase an incorrect entry  press the CLR  S2  button or the  TRANSFER  CLEAR  button    The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the  Station P
15.       Group Page 01    RECHERCHE GR 01    Access to  Paging     Group     to a particular  paging group            Group Page All    RECH  GR    TOUS    Access to  Paging     Group     to all paging  groups         Handset        COMBINE         Volume Control     handset on handset mode           Headset           CASQUE           Volume Control     headset on headset mode        User Manual    371       APPENDIX             English Display    French Display    Description       In a Meeting    In a Meeting    Absent Message 6        Log Locked  123    REG FERME   123       Complete to set  Call Log Lock  Incoming    Complete to set  Electronic Station Lockout            Lunch Mode    MODE PAUSE CAFE    Complete to set  Lunch Mode         Message Cancel    MESSAGE ANNULE    Cancel Absent Message        MODEM Command 1    COMMANDE MODEM 1    Complete to send an AT Command to the  external modem          External Modem Control        MW at Ext 1234    MESS  PST 1234    Complete to set  Message Waiting         MW Not Accepted    MESS ATT  REFUSE    Not complete to set  Message Waiting         MW Cancel E1234    MESS ANNUL P1234    Cancel  Message Waiting  of desired  extension           MW Cancelled    MESS ATT  ANNULE    Cancel one   s own  Message Waiting         Night Mode    SERVICE DE NUIT       Night mode status   Cancel Day mode         Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service        No Held Call          AUCUN APPEL ATT     There is no held call when retrieving call on  hold
16.       SWR Data Dump     1  to print out          SWR Data Clear     0  to clear             Any Telephone    l 2  2 Cie  C    cba    Lift the handset Dial 794  Dial 1 or 0  Confirmation Hang up or press  or press SP PHONE    1 to print out the data tone and dial SP PHONE   MONITOR      0  to clear the data tone  MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt     SWR Data Dump     1  to print out  SWR Data Clear     0  to clear                Conditions       A printer connected to the Serial Interface  RS 232C  connector can be used to print the  recorded data        Ifthe recorded data is cleared  new data will be recorded     302 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features Guide References  System Working Report    User Manual 303    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 4 9 Timed Reminder  Remote  Wake Up Call     The Manager and the Operators can remotely set or cancel the Timed Reminder to the desired  extension     Setting    7235   7436  ZON     ORJ  pee   c  Remote Timed Reminder  A          Features    Press Features  Rotate Jog Dial or press Press Remote Timed Reminder   NEXT until the following  is displayed      lt PT Display Example gt              Extension             NEXT     DSS     extension no    or CLI   hour   minute  o Jo  1      Dial the desired extension Press NEXT  S3   Enter the hour Enter the minute For AM  Dial 0   number or press DSS  01 through 12    00 through 59   For PM  Dial 1    flexible button             
17.       System Speed Dialing Bob aii     Jim Kopp Panasonic     1   Makes a call to a party stored in Konala vetite       1   the system using the directory        i   Zangril Louisa  Nancy Home   lt Example gt  MENU NEXT          To select Jack          9 123 4567 9 987 6543  9111111 955055555  93333333 9 999  97777777 9 4444444  10 9 1000001  MENU NEXT    Adam  Alice Carol    Ann Parker Casey   Ben Johns Ched Ely   Beth Chris  MENU PREV NEXT    UO000   UO000  DUOC  UO000                            Harry Jack  Henry Janny    Hiroshi Jimmy    Isaac John    UOU00  00000    Ivy    s shop Johes  MENU PREV NEXT             Extension Dialing   System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing    1  Press the Extension  F3  or SYS Speed  F9  1  Press the STA Speed  F8  button     button  2  Press the Function button which is next to the    2  Press the Function button which is next to the desired name or number   desired alphabet  To alternate the display between name and    3  Press the Function button which is next to the number  press the NEXT  S3  button   desired name     328 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    You can access various features using the messages which are displayed in alphabetical order   To access the features  press the Feature  F4  button on the initial display first  and search for  the desired feature message by pressing the NEXT  S3  button    Then press the Function butto
18.      1  Deny    0  Allow    On hook     Gly          l See the next page          User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Sixth Display    Paging     Answer    Answers a page sent to a    built in speaker or a  particular external pager                 MENU PREV NEXT  ea    O S                                     Sixth Display      gt 1 4                 Page Ext Answer          Page GRP Answer                Paging Group     gt 0 8                                      Paging Externa   gt 0 4              Parallel On Off  gt 1 0              Paging     Group    MENU PREV NEXT                            Pages to all or particular    extension group           A page sent to a  built in speaker   Paging     Group        Dial the extension group  number  1 through 8  or 0     A page sent to a ooo  external pager     Paging    External        Dial the external pager  number  1 through 4        1  if connected to the KX TD816     1 through 4  if connected  to the KX TD1232     User Manual       See the next page             Paging     External    Pages through all or  particular external pager           Paralleled Telephone  Connection    Sets the paralleled telephone  connection on or off          0  All extension groups     Dial 1 or 0   Dial the external pager ooo    number  1 through 4  or 0  oo  Oo  ooo din   000      1  to set  On     0  to cancel  Off       1  if connected to the KX TD816     1 through 4  if connected    to the KX TD1
19.      Conditions   lt PT gt        There are three types of Line Preference for incoming calls      No Line Prime Outside  Line Ringing Line   Each preference can be selected by Station Programming     e Helpful hints for the Handsfree  speakerphone  operation are noted in the  Handsfree  Operation  feature     Programming Guide References   400  Outside Line Connection Assignment   603 604  DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing       Day   Night    User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  4 3 4 Answering  Direct Outside Line  PT only   4 3 51 Hands free Operation  PT only     User Manual 97    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 Station Features and Operation    4 3 1 Absent Message Capability    You can select one of nine pre programmed Absent Messages  1 9  for your extension  The  display PT users calling your extension see the message you select  Absent messages are used  to inform the party calling to your extension of the reason for your absence  By default   Messages No  1 6 are provided with default messages and the other three messages are left  blank     98 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT        Any Telephone     5   o  Parameters    Lift the handset or press Dial 750  Dial message Dial parameters Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  number  if required and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR    1 through 9     DISPLAY MESSAGE MESSAGE No  PARAMETER    Will Return Soon                   Gone Home       extension
20.      If your telephone has a two  three or six line display  both the Caller ID name and  number are displayed    You can change the display to show the original extension number and name by System  Programming    A flexible CO button can be assigned as a DSS button    To use  One Touch Transfer   System Programming is required     Pressing the FLASH or FLASH RCL button while dialing clears the display  Then you  can enter the revised number    If you want to return to the held call  press the TRANSFER button or corresponding CO   INTERCOM button before the destination extension answers     When  Transfer Recall  occurs  the display shows    lt Example gt        ROTEER ENOS              lt SLT gt     If you want to return to the held call  flash the hookswitch before the destination  extension answers      lt ISDN Telephone gt     This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   108  Automatic Hold by CO   DSS Button   201  Transfer Recall Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References    2 2 2    4 3 87    144    Flexible Button Assignment  Uniform Call Distribution  UCD     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 26 Call Transfer     to Outside Line    You can transfer a call  intercom  outside  to an outside party via outside line     Screened Call Transfer    PT and SLT    During a conversation       TRANSFER  CL  ForPT    l For SLT    A _     For PT  Press TRANSFER  Confirmation  For SL
21.     2 Press down the display  LCD ADJ button       22 User Manual    DPT Overview       KX T7250  Memory Card    Pull out the card and write down the  names or phone numbers associated    Flexible CO Buttons with automatic dialing numbers      Outside lines 01 through 06   Is RINGER Volume Selector  Used to adjust the ringer volume   INTERCOM Button  2    Wi  D        REDIAL Button PROGRAM Button  A    FLASH Button VOLUME Control Button  HOLD Button    AUTO DIAL STORE Button  MONITOR Button TRANSFER Button    User Manual 23    DPT Overview          1 1 3 Connection    Connect as shown   KX T7400 Series DPTs           Connect to the KX TD816 KX TD1232 System     oe ete     Connect to a single line telephone jack   telephone f  line cord Telephone Answering Machine  or FAX for  XDP  or parallel connections    lt Back View gt          XDP eXtra Device Port  expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an  extension port to contain two telephones  For more details  please consult with your dealer     24 User Manual    DPT Overview          KX T7200 Series DPTs    The included  telephone  line cord           Connect to a single line telephone jack  Telephone Answering  Machine  or FAX for XDP  or parallel connections      gt  Connect to the KX TD816 KX TD1232 System       XDP eXtra Device Port  expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an  extension port to contain two telephones  For more details  please consult with your dealer 
22.     78    User Manual    User Programming              To store a pause  press PAUSE     Refer to Pulse to Tone Conversion in the Features Guide       To store a feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF  Dual Tone Multi   Frequency  signals  press the    and   keys   Refer to Pulse to Tone Conversion in the  Features Guide        To prevent displaying of all or part of the number  press SECRET before and after the  secret number  or your entry will not be stored   Refer to Secret Dialing in the Features  Guide      If you are storing an external number  enter the line access code  default  9  81 through 88   before the number  When dialing  a pause is automatically inserted after the code     If you are storing an account code  enter the account code before the line access code   Refer  to Account Code Entry in the Features Guide      It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it in two speed dial  numbers  The line access code should be stored in the first speed dial number     To access another speed dial number in step 3 through 6  press SELECT and start with step  3    To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display  press  gt  or  lt  lt    Program  002   System Speed Dialing Name Set  is used to name the speed dial numbers     User Manual References  4 3 80 System Speed Dialing  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    User Manual
23.     79    User Programming          3 2 3  002  System Speed Dialing Name Set    Description    Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program  001   System Speed  Dialing Number Set   The KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7235 and KX T7436 show the stored  name during System Speed Dialing     Selection     Speed dial number  000 through 499  e Name  10 characters  max      Default  All speed dial numbers     Not Stored    80 User Manual    User Programming          Programming    Display PT       Poe ey eo    Dial 002  Press NEXT  Enter a speed dial number   000 through 499       lt PT Display gt   lt PT Display gt  e To enter speed dial number 000     002 SYS SPD NAME SPD Code     gt  youeaniaise press NEXT    lt PT Display Example gt     000 Not Stored                                      lt To continue  gt   When SELECT is pressed      oO E E   speed dial no        Enter a name  Press STORE  Enter the desired speed  dial number   000 through 499      SELECT          e To delete the current entry  press CLEAR   e To change the current entry  press CLEAR  and enter the new name     Press NEXT or  PREV or SELECT      lt To end  gt     END    a    Press END        Conditions       Speed dial numbers are programmed in program  001   System Speed Dialing Number  Set      e Each name has a maximum of 10 characters        For entering characters  see 2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  KX   T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only      User Manual 8     Us
24.     Example   If the maid finishes cleaning the room        Room Status Ready    Cc  Features       Confirmation  tone and dial  tone    Press Features  Rotate Jog Dial or Press Room Status Ready   press NEXT until the    following is displayed     Example   If the maid finishes cleaning the room       bee    Rotate Jog Dial until   Room Ready    is  displayed     MODE    Confirmation  tone and dial  tone    Press MODE until   Feature Access  is  displayed     Press SELECT     Example   If the maid finishes cleaning the room           gt Room Ready  St Lock abcabc  MENU SEL  Cc e       Confirmation  tone and dial  tone     Press SHIFT  until  FEAT   is displayed     Press FEAT  Rotate Jog Dial Press SEL   until  Room Ready     is at the arrow     288        AS    Hang up or press  SP PHONE     6wa    Hang up or press  SP PHONE     5  Gla    Hang up or press  SP PHONE     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT        Any Telephone  Example   If the maid finishes cleaning the room     gt   Ciee     Lift the handset or press Dial 736  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone  SP PHONE MONITOR     h    ge     m        Conditions       Even if the room status is changed at a telephone in a guest room  DSS button indication  will not be changed automatically  It is renewed when the operator enters the checking  mode again     Programming Guide References   134  Hotel Application    User Manual 289    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT
25.     Lift the handset  Press VOLUME  UP A DOWNY  Control button               lt PT Display Example gt   Handset               volume level 3                You may also adjust the handset receiver volume  during a conversation using the handset receiver        To adjust the headset volume  Display PT    Be sure the headset is connected     SP PHONE       Press SP PHONE  Press VOLUME  UPA  DOWNV  Control button      lt PT Display Example gt   Headset               volume level 3                 38 User Manual    DPT Overview          To adjust the ringer volume    7230   7235  While the telephone is ringing                 Press VOLUME  UP   DOWN V  Control button      lt PT Display Example gt        Ringer        volume level 3              7230   7235    While the telephone is idle and on hook     AN  RING VOLUME    v    Press RING  S2   Press VOLUME  UPA  DOWNV  Control button       The telephone will ring       The telephone will stop ringing in about 4 seconds     When the volume level is 0  no     indication   the display shows  RNGOFF      7220   7250    Adjust the RINGER Volume Selector lever to  the desired setting  OFF LOW HIGH         User Manual 39    DPT Overview          To adjust the speaker volume    SP PHONE    MONITOR       Press SP PHONE  or MONITOR     40       Press VOLUME  UP 4 DOWNY  Control button      lt PT Display Example gt        GP   RP He ae ae ae 2 2 k k kk               volume level 12       You may also adjust the speaker volume while listening
26.     User Manual 25    DPT Overview          1 1 4 Feature Buttons    Digital proprietary telephones  DPTs  have the following types of Feature Buttons     Fixed Buttons    Flexible Buttons    Fixed Buttons    Fixed buttons have specific functions permanently assigned to them  These default function  assignments cannot be changed  The following table lists the fixed buttons located on each                                                                                                    DPT model    Feature Button T7420   T7425  T7431  17433  17436  T7220   17230   T7235   T7250  AUTO ANSWER MUTE   y Vv v Vv v Vv Vv Vv  AUTO DIAL STORE v V v Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  CONF Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  FLASH Vv Vv Vv Vv  FLASH RCL Vv Vv Vv Vv Y  Function buttons Vv Vv  FWD DND Y Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  HOLD Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  INTERCOM Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Y Vv  Jog Dial Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  MESSAGE Vv Y v Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  MODE Vv  MONITOR Vv  PAUSE Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv v Y  PROGRAM Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv  REDIAL Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Y Vv Vv  SELECT Vv  SHIFT Vv Vv Vv Vv  Soft buttons Vv Vv Y Y  26 User Manual    DPT Overview                      Feature Button T7420  17425  T7431   T7433  T7436   T7220  T7230   T7235  T7250  SP PHONE Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv   TRANSFER Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv V Vv Vv Vv  VOLUME Vv Y Y Y                                         f  indicates the button is available     Usage  AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button  Used for Hands free answer back  or it turns the microphone off during a 
27.     co 2 eps    Wait for an answer  Announce  Hang up or press    SP PHONE MONITOR     e The call is transferred     During a conversation           ne d  l   phantom extension no   I A      Dial the destination phantom Ringback tone  extension number     Flash the Confirmation Dial tone  hookswitch  tone       The other party is placed on  consultation hold     y  Eba  Wait for Announce  Hang up     an answer     The call is transferred        User Manual 247    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To transfer a call to a phantom extension  Unscreened Call Transfer     During a conversation     h    J I    Dial tone    fo    TRANSFER    Confirmation  tone    Press TRANSFER     e The other party is placed on hold   consultation hold     During a conversation     Flash the Confirmation Dial tone    hookswitch  tone       The other party is placed on hold   consultation hold        v  Gla  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     Press Phantom   flexible button      Ringback tone    e The call is  transferred     e Ringing starts at the destination  extension     g  GWa    phantom extension no     Dial the destination phantom  extension number        Ringback tone Hang up     e Ringing starts at the destination extension     To answer a phantom extension call    While the Phantom button indicator light is flashing green      Phantom     Press Phantom   flexible button      248       User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions       A p
28.    APPEL VOCAL    Select Voice Calling mode              092 555 42111       092 559 211 1        One Touch Dialing button is assigned        374    Conditions       Ifthe displayed characters exceed sixteen digits    amp   is shown at the right hand edge        The duration time display is only shown when you make or receive an outside call  Count    start time for outgoing calls can be programmed as desired     e When you confirm key programming  be sure to press a button while on hook  If the  Full  One Touch Dialing  feature is set  dialing mode will start when pressing PF  Programmable    Feature   DSS  Direct Station Selection   SAVE or REDIAL button     User Manual       APPENDIX          6 1 2 Feature Number List    Numbers listed below are the initial factory settings  default value   There are flexible feature  numbers and fixed feature numbers  To change the flexible feature numbers  System  Programming is required  For programming instructions  please consult with your dealer   Some Additional Required Digits are different depending on the mode of the Digital Super    Hybrid System your telephone is connected to     Flexible Feature Numbers                                                                                        Feature Default Additional Digits   Ist hundred block extension 1 0 9  00 99   2st hundred block extension 2 0 9  00 99   3st through 16th hundred block extension     0 9  00 99   block   Absent Message capability set cancel 750 1 9 0   Accou
29.    AT Command number       Conditions    e An AT Command can only be programmed by Serial Interface remote programming  software        For more information about the AT Command  please refer to the modem instructions        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Programming Guide References   100  Flexible Numbering   806 807  Serial Interface  RS 232C  Parameters    Features Guide References  External Modem Control    User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    190 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 47 Flash  PT only     You can disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up     While hearing any tone  dialing  or talking   h       FLASH FLASH RCL pa      C  v phone no     Press FLASH or FLASH RCL  Dial tone Dial the phone number        Conditions    e A disconnection signal must be selected by System Programming in order to execute this  feature     Programming Guide References   414  Disconnect Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 45 External Feature Access    User Manual 191    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 48 Full One Touch Dialing  PT only     The hands free speakerphone is automatically activated  You can enter a phone number or  access a system feature wit
30.    At the destination extension     oc For PT h     Die  your extension no  v  For PT  SLT    Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  Dial your Confirmation  or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  extension number  tone and  SP PHONE MONITOR  dial tone                e You may press the flexible button assigned as  the FWD DND button instead     y  lt PT Display Example gt   Gb          FWD  From  EXtXXXX             Hang up or press  iis your extension number  SP PHONE MONITOR        The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly at your extension        Conditions     This feature can be canceled either at your own extension or at the destination extension     e Class of service  Class of service programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature     Programming Guide References   991  COS Additional Information    User Manual 125    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 15 Call Forwarding     CANCEL    There are two canceling methods for  Call Forwarding   The canceling method depends on the  Call Forwarding type that is assigned   Canceling Call Forwarding at your  original  extension    7235   7436  FWD DND Cancel    FWD DND    Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press FWD DND Cancel  F1   Confirmation tone  press SP PHONE  and dial tone    a  gwa  lt PT Display Example gt     Hang up or press  SP PHONE  FWD DND Cancel             e The FWD DND indicator light turns off     PT and SLT    FWD DND  For PT    Lift the handset or press For PT  Press 
31.    FEAT  is displayed     Enter OGM number Confirmation tone   1 through 4       lt PT Display Example gt         OGM Play  OGM Record  MENU  oa oO OOO Ld       Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL    OGM Play  is at the  arrow     AUTO DIAL  STORE    Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone  playback is finished        The STORE indicator light turns off     OGM 1 Play 28  Time counter  seconds     e The STORE indicator lights   e The message is played back and the counter starts     298       User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Playing back a message    Any Telephone    C  EY  3  6  2      Lift the handset or press Dial 362  Enter OGM number Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR   1 through 4      hy  lt PT Display Example gt        AUTO DIAL pa  fo   oy  OGM 1 Play 28  SIOPE Time counter  seconds     Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone    RS   The STORE indicator lights      The message is played back and the counter starts        The STORE indicator light turns off        Conditions     OGM Type  1  for DISA Message 1 or UCD Message 1  2  for DISA Message 2 or UCD Message 2  3  for Timed Reminder Message or UCD Message 3  4  UCD Message 4    e You can select a maximum recording time of 0 16 32 64 seconds for each message   Outgoing Message Time   The total length must be under sixty four seconds     Programming Guide References   215  Outgoing Message Time    User Manual References  4 3 36 Direct Inward System Access  DISA   4 3 81 Timed R
32.    For PT  Press TRANSFER  Dial tone Dial 33  Enter a paging group Confirmation  For SLT  Flash the hookswitch  number  1 through 8   tone  optional                    The other party is placed on  consultation hold     2   e  cbs    Announce  Wait Confirmation Hang up or press  for an tone  optional  SP PHONE MONITOR   answer     e The held party and the paged extension are  connected and can start a conversation        242 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions    e A confirmation tone is audible before making the voice announcement   Eliminating the tone is programmable     Programming Guide References   602  Extension Group Assignment   805  External Pager Confirmation Tone   990  System Additional Information    User Manual 243    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 69 Paralleled Telephone Connection    A Proprietary Telephone  PT  can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone  SLT    This feature allows you to enable or disable SLT ringing  When a parallel connection is made   either telephone can be used     To enable   disable SLT ringing     1   rine h n          DA y  y BIA  ee  i    e    Lift the handset or press Dial 39  For Ring mode  Dial 1  Confirmation Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  For No Ring mode  Dial 0  tone  optional  SP PHONE        MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        Parallel      when enabling                                   Parallel      when disabling        Condition
33.    Press NEXT or  PREV or SELECT        e There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX TD816  and 128 extension numbers  for KX TD1232  Each extension number can be two  three  or four digits  consisting of 0    through 9  The   and   keys cannot be used        For the KX TD1232  jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through  64 are for the Slave  if available     e An extension number is invalid if the first or second digits do not match with the program   100   Flexible Numbering   01   16  1st through 16th hundred extension blocks  setting     84    User Manual    User Programming          If one digit is assigned as the leading digit  some extensions have two digits and some have  three digits  If two digits are assigned  some have three digits and some have four digits   Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack  If eXtra Device Port  XDP  is disabled  for the jack in program  600   EXtra Device Port  the extension number of the second part   XX 2  is not available   XX jack number    For an explanation of jack numbering  see  Rotation of jack number     A double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the program  012   ISDN  Extension Number Set    118   Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment    124    Phantom Extension Number Assignment  and  813   Floating Number Assignment    Valid entry examples are  10 and 11  10 and 110  Invalid entry examples are  10 and 106   210 and 21     Program  004   Extension Name Set  is used to n
34.    Station Speed Dialing       System Speed Dialing       System Feature Access Menu        f  indicates the feature is available                       Helpful Information about Display Operation  Press CONT  S1  to adjust the display contrast   Press RING  S2  to adjust the ringer volume   Press BGM  S3  to turn on off the BGM   Press MENU  S1  to return to the initial display   Press PREV  S2  to return to the previous display   Press NEXT  S3  to advance to the next display   Press ACCNT  S3  to enter an account code           User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 2 Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb  KX T7436   KX T7235    only   You can set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb features using the display   Features on the First Display Off hook   G  FY    Press the  FWD DND button     FWD DND       FWD DND Cancel First Display    Cancels the Call Forwarding  and Do Not Disturb  DND   features at your extension        FWD DND Cancel  Do Not Disturb  FWD A11 Calls  FWD Busy  FWD No Answer  MENU PREV                                                       Do Not Disturb  DND  Call Forwarding Press the NEXT    On hook  Rejects incoming calls  Sets forwarding all incoming calls  S3  button to go  to another extension  when busy or to the next display   g when you do not answer     Gw             On hook  Dial destination  extension number        ooo  Ghia dF    On hook   4   J    Gw    User Manual 313    Station Features and Operation  DP
35.    User Manual 361    DSS Console Features          5 3 2 One Touch Dialing    The stored number is dialed automatically by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button     PT and DSS Console     Paired telephone   DSS Console     2  DSS     SA os E    Lift the handset or press Press the desired  SP PHONE MONITOR  DSS or PF button        362 User Manual    DSS Console Features          5 3 3 One Touch Access for System Features    You can access system features by pressing a programmed DSS or PF button     PT and DSS Console     Paired telephone   DSS Console     Q  DSS   PF     tY Oor    Lift the handset or press Press the desired  SP PHONE MONITOR  DSS or PF button        User Manual 363    DSS Console Features          5 3 4 Call Transfer    A call can be transferred to an extension by using the DSS button     PT and DSS Console    During a conversation    Paired telephone   DSS Console     TRANSFER  DSS     Press TRANSFER  Press the desired DSS button        One Touch Transfer    An outside call can be transferred to an extension with an One Touch operation   The One Touch Transfer function must be set through System Programming     PT and DSS Console    During a conversation      DSS Console      DSS     Press the desired DSS button        The other party is placed on hold and the  destination extension is called immediately        Programming Guide References   108  Automatic Hold by CO   DSS Button    364 User Manual    DSS Console Features          5 3 5 ANSWER and RELEASE 
36.    Walking COS set 47 Walking COS password your extension no   Whisper OHCA set cancel 731 3 0          1 Available for the KX TD1232 only   2 hhmm hh  hour 01 12  mm  minute 00 59     Fixed Feature Numbers       Feature    Default       While a busy tone is heard     Executive Busy Override    OHCA  Whisper    Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On   Busy Station Signaling  BSS     Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA         e NOK ao       While Do Not Disturb tone is heard   Do Not Disturb  DND  Override       During calling or talking   Account Code Delimiter    Conference  Door open  Pulse to Tone Conversion    Alternate Calling     Ring Voice          When the telephone is on hook   Background Music  BGM  on off  Day Night mode display    Date and Time display Self Extension Number  and name display switching             User Manual    377    APPENDIX          Conditions     Extension numbers can be three or four digits in length  Any number can be set as the  leading first or second digit   e Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed while a dial tone is heard   e When      or     are included in a feature number  it will not be possible for users with dial  pulse  DP  telephones to access the feature     Programming Guide References   003  Extension Number Set   100  Flexible Numbering    User Manual References  3 2 4  003  Extension Number Set    378 User Manual    APPENDIX          6 1 3 Tone List   lt TONE gt     Confirmation Tone 1    Confirmation Tone 2    Confirmation T
37.   1 8     S                 To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     52 User Manual    Station Programming          Conditions  e  1  X       FLASH or FLASH RCL  PAUSE  SECRET  INTERCOM  and      CONF    can also be stored       If you do not want to display the stored number  press the SECRET  INTERCOM  button  before and after the numbers you wish to conceal        If you store an external party   s number  you should first store a line access number  9  81  to 88         If you need to enter an account code  you can enter the specified account code before the  line access number      lt Example gt   _ SECRET    __  49 1234   9  123 4567 J   Sa    T  r ea Aaah Ra  Account code feature no  Account code Account code delimiter Automatic line Phone number  access number    e   This button is used for the voice mail integration feature      To exit the mode at any time  lift the handset     User Manual 53    Station Programming          2 2 3 Phantom Extension Ringing On Off Set    Allows you to assign a ringing On Off function on a Phantom button  default  On          Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      AUTO DIAL    SS om Oh    Press Phantom you Press the same Phantom Dial 1or 2  Press STORE   wish to turn On Off the again   1  Ring Off  ringing   2  Ring On    STORE      The display shows   The STORE indicator lights   the current status    The display shows the initial  programming mode      lt
38.   7436  2    c  Features a c  Night On Off  70 3     A  Cc    Press Features  Press Night On   Off button     Rotate Jog Dial or  press NEXT until the  following is displayed     Day Mode  Lo   j _   1 Js j y  Night Mode   J  G Wd    2   Lunch Mode  Hang up or press      3   Break Mode Confirmation tone SP PHONE     Enter the desired mode  number  0 to 3               e The display shows the current mode        214 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Switching the mode  Display operation     Night Mode 0 3    SELECT MODE     Coo    Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT      Feature Access     Night Mode    is displayed   is displayed      o  Day Mode   E        1  Night Mode 6 bd         2   Lunch Mode Confirmation tone Hang up or press    SP PHONE   Ea Break Mode    Enter the desired mode  number  0 to 3            e The display shows the current mode        Switching Day Night mode  Display operation     Night Mode 0 3  OGM Play 1 4  MENU SEL  Ce Ce C  A          Press SHIFT Press FEAT  Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL   until    FEAT    is    Night Mode    is at the  displayed  arrow      o  Day Mode   1   Night Mode y 5    v    2   Lunch Mode G  J ry    Confirmation tone Hang up or press    3   Break Mode SP PHONE        Enter the desired mode  number  0 to 3      e The display shows the current mode        User Manual 215    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Switching Day Night mode  Night button operation      Ni
39.   Conditions       Confirmation tone  A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up  Eliminating the tone is  programmable     e You can pick up an incoming outside  intercom or doorphone call    lt PT gt      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation    lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   602  Extension Group Assignment   990  System Additional Information    Features Guide References  Extension Group    User Manual References  4 3 23 Call Pickup Deny  4 3 27 Call Waiting  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 137    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 22 Call Pickup  Outside Line    Allows you to answer an incoming outside call that is ringing at another extension     Any telephone    CQ M  ON ax  r     Lift the handset or press Dial 4X  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR   optional        Conditions    e Confirmation Tone  A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up  Eliminating the tone is  programmable      lt PT gt      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 23 Call Pickup Deny  4 3 27 Call Waiting  4
40.   DIL    Integrated Services Digital Network  ISDN      Basic Rate Interface  BRI   Integrated Services Digital Network  ISDN      Primary Rate Interface  PRI   Intercept Routing   Lunch   Break Service   Night Service   Outside Line Connection Assignment     Outgoing   Ringing  Delayed   Toll Restriction    User Manual Reference    2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment   4 3 39 Doorphone Call   4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu   4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 59 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     Allows you to signal a busy extension on a handset call that your call is waiting  Your voice is  heard through the built in speaker of the called party s PT  KX T7235 or KX T7436   The  called extension user can select to talk to you or their initial caller   Setting   7235   7436    EAEEREN    a     g  9 Gls    Lift the handset or press Dial 7312  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   Call Waiting 2                      Canceling    7235   7436    Q   v   rs f ba       6wa  Lift the handset or press Dial 7310  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   Call Waiting Off                   Executing  7230   7235   7433   7436    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call     l    ie    BSS Y   BJ 3     Press B
41.   Extension Name Set  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    198 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 53 Live Call Screening  LCS   PT only     When you have set a Voice Mail extension as the Call Forwarding destination and have  activated the LCS feature  you can monitor a message while a caller is leaving the message in  your mailbox  If desired  you can answer the call while monitoring  There are two methods  available  In both modes  if you are currently having a conversation  you will hear a Call  Waiting tone     Hands free mode  You can monitor a message automatically through the telephone speaker at  the same time     Private mode  You will hear an alert tone while the caller is leaving a message     Preparation  e Activating the LCS mode  System Programming   e Assigning the LCS button  Station System Programming   e Selecting the mode  Hands free or Private  Station Programming      Setting the Password  Feature Number System Programming      Setting the LCS feature            Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice  Processing System  one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100      User Manual 199    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Flowchart of the Live Call Screening  LCS  Feature                                         
42.   Hands free mode 199  Hands free Operation 195    HOLD 26  Hotel Application     Room Status 287  I    Initial Display Selection 51   Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series 37  Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series 32  Initial Settings 50   INTERCOM 26   Intercom Alert Assignment 51  Intercom Calling 95  197    J  Jog Dial 26  27  339    L    LCS  Live Call Screening  29   LCS  Live Call Screening  Cancel 29  LCS Password Clear 205   LED Indication 41   Line Access 95   Line Access  Automatic 231   Line Access  Individual 231   Line Access  Outside Line Group 231  Live Call Screening  LCS  199   Live Call Screening Mode Set 51  Live Call Screening Password Control 290  Location of Controls 15  353  Lockout 206   Log In   Log Out 29  207   Loop CO 29    M    Making Calls 95  MESSAGE 26 29  Message Waiting 209  Microphone Mute 213  MODE 26  MONITOR 26    N    Night 29  Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service 214    O    Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA  219  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA       Whisper 223    Off Hook Monitor 227   ONE TOUCH 29   One Touch Access Assignment for System  Features 360   One Touch Access for System Features 363   One Touch Dialing 229  362   One Touch Dialing Assignment 359   One Touch Transfer 364   Operator Call 230   Operator Manager Service Features 282   Outgoing Message  OGM  291   Outward Dialing 95  231   Overlay 69    P    Paging and Transfer 240   Paging     ANSWER 238   Paging     Deny 239   Paging     SUMMARY 234  Paralleled Telephone Connect
43.   Jog Dial Operation Display      KX T7431  While idle  the display changes as follows by pressing the MODE button   The Jog Dial operation is available in the second through seventh displays     E OCT01 10 10A                                                                                                                      Seventh Display                         User Manual 339    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT               KX T7433  The Jog Dial operation is available in the third display  While idle  the bottom line of the  display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows        Initial Display   CONT RING BGM    SHIET                                                                Third Display   STA EXT FEAT pe  L                                      KX T7436  The Jog Dial operation is available in the initial and third display  While idle  the bottom line  of the display changes by pressing the SHIFT button as follows        Jan  1 03 00PM    re T Co  Extension STA speed  Features SYS speed  Call Log  CONT RING BGM                                                                               Third Display                                        Conditions       The sixth and seventh displays of the KX T7431 are used for the ringer volume and display  contrast adjustments  For details  refer to the  Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series   1 1 1 Configuration in this manual     340 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 11 KX T
44.   Please change the password periodically     d  We strongly recommend that you set the system password to 7 digits for maximum  protection against  hackers      User Manual    Table of Contents          Table of Contents    1 DPT Overview    VED     COnPSUMATION S cciccsens cosacessssecescsceaeecessevascssosseseesecessesesassovesedsadscescesunndonse cones sosedessesedesaeses 14  Ld     Configurations   28h0  gah a a htc Alin Mica a  rete tei hanes Alanon 14  1 1 2  Location Of ControlSet pee ha Ea EE e tieed E tetas 15  tA    COMMECHON serina E E A E a 24  V1 4  Feature Buttons ees cenon E a A e E E N a aE Esa 26  1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series        cccccccccesseesseeseceeeceseeeseeeececseecsseneeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaes 32  1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series        cc cccccccesseeeseeseceeeceseeeseeeeeecseecaeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeaaes 37  ELET LED Indication naini e yucatan a N a O E a o eE 41  2 Station Programming  2 1 Station Programming Instructions         sessoessoessesssesssesssesssessecssoesoosssoossossoossoosssosssosssee 44  2 1 1 Station Programming Instructions         ssesseseeseeseesseeeoseeseoesesseeessesresstesrssosseesosstesresesses 44  2 2 Station Programming               ccccscscscessccssssccscscscccsssescsssscesecssscessscessssesssessscssssesseseess 50  ZDel s    MMTIALS Ste GS  0  ss sashes ezsascshes saceuseaseete tats chesin E E E E OE R 50  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment            ccccccccsecsseceseseeceeeecseecsceeaeceseceeeseseeeseesaecs
45.   STORE    Press STORE  Press PROGRAM to exit  the Station Programming mode        The STORE indicator lights        Conditions       Ifthe extension user forgets their pre set password  they can ask the Manager or an Operator  to clear the password     User Manual References  4 5 4 Call Log Lock  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235   KX T7230 only     286 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 4 4 Hotel Application     Room Status  operator only     Allows the operator to handle the front operator service of checking the room status  ready or  not ready  with the DSS button on the DSS Console paired to a KX T7436 or KX T7235   Changing the room status can be done by the operator and also by the telephone in a guest  room    The hotel application must be enabled by System Programming    The DSS button indicates as follows     Ready mode  Off  Not Ready mode  Flashes red    To check the room status    7235   7436    coi Room Status    Press Hotel  Press Room Status     e The indicator in NOT Ready mode flashed red        To change the room status    7235   7436     DSS   Cy  Room Status or TL_     Press Hotel  Press Room Status  Dial the extension Press DSS  number   flexible button      e You can press   to select  all extensions              A  Cc co  c        Press END  Press RDY or NRDY  Press END        User Manual 287    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To change the room status at a telephone in a guest room  7235   7436
46.   TME                   Directly     the party s voice is  heard without ringing     No  Use the same tone    Call Waiting Tone 1                       Yes  Use a different tone    Call Waiting Tone 2     You can monitor the message  through the telephone speaker    Hands free mode     He  Ae    A                Only an alert tone is heard    Private mode     Caller ID    A             Outside line name             DID extension name    English                French    Handset                   Headset       ll fe        To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual       51    Station Programming          2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment        Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      To continue    AUTO DIAL   The STORE indicator lights     STORE   The display shows the initial  Press the desired Follow programming Press STORE  programming mode    Flexible  CO  DSS input    or PF  button you   wish to assign as   the Account button        a programming input             Programmable Button  Button Programming Input  PF    One Touch Dialing oY  2  Desired no  1  max  16 digits     FWD DND  Forward Do Not Disturb   SAVE          NS    NX  SN    Account  CONF  Conference   Log In Log Out    NILSEN ESESTSISTS  N SN   e  h    Live Call Screening     Live Call Screening Cancel           01 08  for KX TD816  Single CO CO  Outside line no  94g ffor KX TD1232     Group CO      Outside line group no 
47.   The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in  alphabetical order  The available features are as follows        Absent Message Capability Hotel Application     Room Status  from a  Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On   guest room   Cancel Live Call Screening  LCS   Password Set  Background Music  BGM      External Log In   Log Out  Call Log  Incoming Message Waiting  Call Log Lock  Incoming Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service  Call Park Outgoing Message  OGM   Call Pickup  Directed Paging     External  Call Pickup  Group Paging     Group  Call Pickup  Outside Line Paging     ANSWER  Call Pickup Deny Paging     DENY  Call Waiting Paralleled Telephone Connection  Data Line Security Pickup Dialing  Hot Line   Door Opener Station Program Clear  Doorphone Call System Working Report  Electronic Station Lockout Timed Reminder  Executive Busy Override Deny Timed Reminder  Remote  Wake Up Call   External Modem Control Walking COS                338 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           3  Hotel Application  KX T7436 only     The display message for the Hotel Application appears only when it is enabled in system  programming     Jog Dial Operation    You can search for desired items on the corresponding display menu by using the Jog Dial   Rotate the Jog Dial in either direction as desired  The items will be displayed as follows     Left Right     counter clockwise  A N  clockwise   To the previous To the next  item  
48.   e Ifthe presentation is enabled  the other party can check the caller   s number before  answering the call     Programming Guide References   100  Flexible Numbering    Features Guide References  Calling Line Identification Presentation  CLIP   Calling Line Identification Restriction  CLIR     User Manual References  4 3 29 Calling Line Identification Presentation  CLIP     User Manual 155    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 31 Camp On Transfer to Phantom Extension    Allows you to transfer a call to busy phantom extensions   The call is transferred when at least one extension becomes free        Dial tone Dial the destination phantom  extension number       phantom extension no        y  63  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     Conditions       Ifthe destination extension does not become free within twelve rings  default    Transfer  Recall  occurs  If the transferred call is an outside call  it is possible to select whether  Transfer Recall will go to the initiating extension or to Operator 1 by System Programming    e If there is no answer within thirty minutes after  Transfer Recall  starts  the line will be  disconnected     156 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt PT gt   e Ifyou misdial  press the FLASH or FLASH RCL button  and re enter the number    lt SLT gt        Ifyou want to return to the held call  flash the hookswitch before the destination  extension answers     Programming Guide References   201  Trans
49.   number                   v  6l  Hang up or press    SP PHONE MONITOR        The COS level of the extension  returns to the original level     e Class of Service  COS  programming is used to define the features which are allowed for a  group of extensions  Each extension is assigned a COS number  The programmable items    are as follows     a  Outgoing call restriction level  Day mode   Night mode      1 through 8    b  Restriction of an outside call duration    c  Transfer a call to an outside party    d  Forward a call to an outside party    e  Executive Busy Override    f  Executive Busy Override Deny    g  Override Do Not Disturb of the called extension    280    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           h  Account Code Entry operation     verified     all calls   verified     to toll restriction override    option   i  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA    j  Access the Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service   k  The number of allowed dialing digits during an outside call    lt PT gt       With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature   using the display operation     Programming Guide References   121  Walking COS Password   601  Class of Service    Features Guide References  Class of Service  COS     User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 281    Station Features and Operation 
50.   will be used     Programming Guide References   202  Call Forwarding     No Answer Time   619  Extension Call Forwarding     No Answer Time    User Manual 121    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 13 Call Forwarding     to Outside Line    You can forward all incoming calls to your extension to an outside party via a CO or TIE line   The telephone number of the outside party must be pre programmed     7235   7436  FWD DND  as   NEXT    Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press NEXT  S3   Press FWD CO Line  F2    press SP PHONE     FWD CO Line  dial     fs    line access code   phone no             ems    Enter a line Dial the Dial    Confirmation tone Hang up or press  access code phone number  and dial tone SP PHONE    9 or 81 through 88             lt PT Display Example gt   e When you dial  1234567     FWD  CO  91234567                The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly     PT and SLT    FWD DND  For PT    S UA l  Eo o a ST  e  ee      Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  Dial 6  Enter a line Dial the Dial     or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  access code phone number   SP PHONE MONITOR   9 or 81   through 88            h a  p D 5  lt PT Display Example gt   N Gha e When you dial  1234567      FWD  CO  91234567                Confirmation Hang up or press aan z  tone and SP PHONE MONITOR  e The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly     dial tone       122 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions  e Up t
51.  149   Calling Line Identification Presentation  CLIP   152   Calling Line Identification Restriction  CLIR   154   Camp On Transfer to Phantom Extension 156    384    Class of Service 89   CONF 26 29   Conference 158   Conference  Unattended 162   Configuration 14  352   Connection 24   CTI  Computer Telephony Integration  Code  Entry 164    D    Data Line Security 149  165   Date and Time Set 74   Direct Inward System Access  DISA  167  Direct Station Dialing 361   DISA User Codes 89   Display Contrast Adjustment 32  37  Display Examples 368   Display Features 326  338   Do Not Disturb  DND  171   Do Not Disturb  DND  Override 174  Doorphone Call 176    DSS 355  DSS  Direct Station Selection  29  E    Electronic Station Lockout 180   Emergency Call 182   Entering Characters 72   Executive Busy Override Deny 184  185  187  Executive Busy Override     Extension 183  Executive Busy Override     Outside Line 185  Extension Name Set 86   Extension Number Assignment 358  Extension Number Set 83   External Feature Access 188   External Modem Control 190    F    Feature Buttons 26  355  Feature Number List 375  Fixed Buttons 26   Fixed Feature Numbers 377  FLASH 26   Flash 191   FLASH RCL 26   Flexible Button Assignment 52  Flexible Buttons 26  29   Full One Touch Dialing 51  192  229  Function buttons 26  FWD DND 26 29    G    General Programming Instructions 68  Group CO 29    Index          H    Handset Microphone Mute 193  Handset Headset Selection 51  Hands free Answerback 194
52.  3 13  4 3 14  4 3 15  4 3 16  4 3 17  4 3 18  4 3 19  4 3 20  4 3 21  4 3 22  4 3 23  4 3 24  4 3 25  4 3 26  4 3 27  4 3 28  4 3 29  4 3 30  4 3 31  4 3 32  4 3 33  4 3 34  4 3 35  4 3 36  4 3 37  4 3 38  4 3 39  4 3 40  4 3 41  4 3 42  4 3 43  4 3 44  4 3 45  4 3 46  4 3 47  4 3 48  4 3 49  4 3 50  4 3 51  4 3 52    Answering  Direct Outside Line  PT only           ceecessecsseesseesteeteceeeceeeseeeeeeeeneeeesees 107  Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On            ccceccccesseesseesseseceeceseceeceseeeseeeseeeeeessees 108  Background Music  BGM   PT only           ceccecseesseenceesteeeeeeeeceseeeeneessecaeenaeenseeeseeaes 111  Busy Station Signaling  BSS         c ccccceccccsessecseeeeseeseceeceeeseeeceseesseeesecnsecesaeneeseenaes 112  Call Forwarding     SUMMARY       ceccecccccsecsseesseeteceeceseeeseeesecsseceseneeeeeeeeeeeaeeseees 114  Call Forwarding     All Calls secsccciscccciisteichsieesddesieceievascohasbiecdadsedusvastecatesth Seesenhtesaets 116  Call Forwarding      Busy  lt c   cciiscieesccetuieenctecedsocess Waveeus covielat coke daa cevsde wetedtebinahuvees 117  Call Forwarding     No Answet       ccccccccssecssesssecsseeseceeeceseeeseeesecesaecseseeeseeeeseeeseeaees 118  Call Forwarding     Busy   No Answet       c ccccccsccsscessecesceseceeeeceeesseesaecnsecneeenseeaes 120  Call Forwarding     to Outside Line          cccececccecsseesseeseentecesceeeceeeeseeseeeeseeeneeessees 122  Call Forwarding     Follow Me       cceccccccccsscesseesseeseceseceeceeecseee
53.  33 Conference  Unattended  PT only     When you are in a conference with two outside parties  you can leave the three party  conference allowing the other two parties to continue their conversation     To establish an Unattended Conference    During a conversation with two outside parties     CONF    Press CONF to leave the conference     e An outside to outside line call between the other two parties is established        To return to the conference    Press CO flashing green moderately        To answer Hold Recall  To return to the conference on the line     While hearing Hold Recall   C  CO   ro  oO     Q    Lift the handset or Press CO button which  press SP PHONE  is flashing rapidly   MONITOR        Conditions    e When an Unattended Conference is established  an alarm tone is sent to both outside parties  fifteen seconds before the assigned duration time limit  default  10 min    Hold Recall  is  activated to the extension that leaves the conference fifty seconds before the time out  The  call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension returns to the conference        If you are off hook and hear  Hold Recall  during the Unattended Conference mode  the  display flashes  CO 02  amp  CO 03   for example  for five seconds at fifteen second intervals        Whether an extension is able to establish a  Conference  Unattended  depends on the  Class  of Service  assignment     162 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Programming Guide Re
54.  4 3 15 Call Forwarding     CANCEL  4 3 37 Do Not Disturb  DND   4 3 88 Voice Mail Integration  4 5 2 Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb  KX T7436   KX T7235 only          This setting can changed by System Programming     User Manual 115    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 9 Call Forwarding     All Calls    All of calls coming to your extension are forwarded to the pre assigned extension  automatically   Setting   7235   7436    FWD All Calls  ext     FWD DND  A i  extension no     Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press FWD AII Calls  F3   Enter the destination Confirmation tone  press SP PHONE  extension number  and dial tone        lt PT Display Example gt          FWD  A11  Extxxxx  y  G L extension number where    the call is to be forwarded             Hang up or press aa A  SP PHONE     The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly     PT and SLT    FWD DND  For PT    PATI rer    Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  Enter the destination Confirmation  or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  extension number  tone and  SP PHONE MONITOR  dial tone          e You may press the flexible button assigned as  the FWD DND button instead         lt PT Display Example gt   Ga FWD  A11  Extxxxx                   a extension number where  Hang up or press the call is to be forwarded    SP PHONE MONITOR   e The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly        116 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 10 Call Forwarding     Busy    Yo
55.  4 3 27 Call Waiting    If  BSS  is not displayed or you hear a reorder tone when you set this feature  this feature  will not be set at the called party  This feature is only available if the called extension has  set the  Call Waiting  feature    Only the extensions which have enabled  Call Waiting  can receive Call Waiting tones   Depending on the party s telephone  the  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA   or   Whisper OHCA  function can be applied  You can talk to the party through the speaker  and the microphone while the party is having another conversation using the handset      lt ISDN Telephone gt     User       This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Manual References    4 3 27 Call Waiting  4 3 59 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA   4 3 60 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     Whisper  PT only     User Manual    113    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 8 Call Forwarding     SUMMARY    Automatically transfers incoming calls to another extension or to an external destination  The    following types are available           Type Description  Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension       All Calls       Call Forwarding    All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when                 to Outside Line        Busy your extension is busy    Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when you      No Answer do not answer the call    Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwa
56.  5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    138 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 23 Call Pickup Deny    Allows you to prevent another extension from picking up your calls with the  Call Pickup   feature     Setting   Canceling  Any Telephone    A Ce e    Lift the handset or press To set  Dial 7201  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  To cancel  Dial 7200  and dial tone     lt PT Display Example gt     y  G  J rm  e When setting     Hang up or press C Pickup Deny  SP PHONE MONITOR           When canceling     C Pickup Allow                   Conditions   lt PT gt        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     User Manual References  4 3 20 Call Pickup  Directed  4 3 21 Call Pickup  Group  4 3 22 Call Pickup  Outside Line  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 139    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 24 Call Splitting    Allows you to have two callers on a line and alternate between them  Ifa call comes in while  you are already on the line  you can place the current call  1st call  on hold and have a  conversation with the other party  2nd call      When you are engaged in the 2nd call  inside outside   while placing the 1st call  
57.  ANSWER MUTE Button    20 User Manual    DPT Overview                  KX T7230  PROGRAM Button  Display  Liquid Crystal Display   Flexible CO Buttons with 16 characters 2 line readout    Outside lines 01 through 24  Shows the date  time  dialed number or  name  call duration time  etc  In  MESSAGE Button Programming mode  it shows the  Programming instructions   FWD DND Button  Soft Buttons  CONF Button  S1 through S3   INTERCOM Button    SHIFT Button    TRANSFER Button    REDIAL Button PAUSE Button  FLASH Button VOLUME Control Button  HOLD Button AUTO DIAL STORE Button  Microphone AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button    SP PHONE Button    User Manual    21    DPT Overview                KX T7235  Function Buttons Display  Liquid Crystal Display    F1 through F5  with 24 characters 6 line readout   Shows the date  time  dialed number or  PROGRAM Button name  call duration time  etc  In  Programming mode  it shows the  MESSAGE Button Programming instructions   FWD DND Button Function Buttons  F6 through F10  CONF Button   8    INTERCOM Button    SHIFT Button    Soft Buttons   S1 through S3     REDIAL Button Flexible CO Buttons   Outside lines 01 through 12   FLASH Button  TRANSFER Button  HOLD Button  PAUSE Button  Microphone  VOLUME Control Button  SP PHONE Button  AUTO DIAL STORE Button    AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button    To lift or set down the display         To lift the display  1 Press the LCD ADJ button   2 Lift up the display        To set down the display    1 Press the LCD ADJ button 
58.  Alert Assignment  default  Ring Call    g  Live Call Screen Mode Set  default  Hands free    h  Preferred Line Preference     Incoming  default  Ringing Line    i  Preferred Line Preference     Outgoing  default  INTERCOM Line         Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      AUTO DIAL    STORE  Press STORE      lt PT Display Example gt    The STORE indicator lights     The display shows the initial programming  mode        Clear Ready                     To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     58 User Manual    Station Programming          2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  K X T7235   KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only     Allows you to assign frequently dialed numbers and names to each Function button on your PT   For KX T7235 and KX T7436 users    To store a number      Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      7235   7436       AUTO DIAL    Enter the desired number Press STORE    extension number   phone number  etc       desired number          STORE    PT PGM Mode F10    Press Function  F1 F10      The STORE indicator lights     The STORE indicator light turns off    The display shows the initial    The display shows the current status  programming mode    If nothing is stored   Not Stored  is displayed     lt PT Display Example gt   909 123 4567     Outside number  123 4567   CLR NEXT is now programmed                    Up to 16 digits 
59.  Another Extension  Phantom Extension  Message Wating  Message Wating     Press MESSAGE button  Another Extension Message Waiting button or the  Phantom Extension Message Waiting button repeatedly until the desired message appears     e The message notifications you received are shown on the display in the order  they were received    lt PT Display Example gt   When Tony at extension 123 left a message notification     123  Tony    Calling back the message notification sender          MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE  or CL  or l x    Another Extension  Phantom Extension  Message Waiting  Message Waiting     Lift the handset or press Dial tone 4   when Press MESSAGE button  Another Extension Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR  a message has been Message Waiting button or the Phantom Extension  received at your Message Waiting button   extension     e If there are more than one message e The message notification is  notification left on your extension  you cleared after the conversation   can choose the desired message sender   display PT only           One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix  Section 6      210 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT        PT and SLT    h    oy par  ey    D    Lift the handset or press Dial tone 4   when Dial 702   SP PHONE MONITOR  a message has been  received at your  extension      The message notification is  cleared after the conversation          One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix  Sectio
60.  Attendant  48 DSS buttons  ANSWER button   RELEASE button                 Conditions     The DSS Console and the PT should be placed side by side on your desk      A single line telephone cannot be utilized in conjunction with the DSS Console      For System Programming  please consult with your dealer     Programming Guide References   007  DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment    352 User Manual    DSS Console Features          5 1 2 Location of Controls    KX T7240    DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field  BLF   01 through 32     Used to access extensions  The BLF indicates the busy or idle status of each  corresponding extension in the system  These buttons can also be changed to  other function buttons              PF  Programmable Feature  Buttons  01 through 16    These buttons are provided with no default settings  With a paired  telephone  you can program the buttons as other function buttons      lt Back View gt     TO EMSS       Used to connect to the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System    User Manual 353    DSS Console Features          KX T7440 KX T7441    DSS Buttons with DSS Buttons with  Busy Lamp Field  BLF  01 through 66  Busy Lamp Field  BLF  01 through 48        ANSWER Button RELEASE Button    Connection           Connect to the Panasonic Digital    Included telephone Super Hybrid System     line cord                354 User Manual    DSS Console Features          5 1 3 Feature Buttons    DSS Consoles have the following types of Feature Buttons   
61.  Call Waiting feature   Call Waiting  OHCA or Whisper  OHCA      Place a call on hold in a system  parking area     Cancel the setting which reserves a  busy line     Refuse or accept an indication tone   e g   call waiting tone     Unlock the door   Call the doorphone     Turn on off the background music  through the external pagers       Control the external modem by  sending a pre assigned AT  Command     Assign the password for the Live Call  Screening feature     Deny other people from seeing your  call log     Select how the 31st call is treated   either it is disregarded or overwrites  the oldest call     Join or leave an extension group     Cancel a message waiting  notification     Leave a message waiting notification  so that the called party may call you  back     Change the day night mode     Playback the outgoing message     Record an outgoing message       Deny or allow being paged        348    User Manual       Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Display   KX 1T7436 KX T7235     Display   KX T7431 KX T7433     Feature Description       Page Ext Answer    gt 1 4     Page GRP Answer    Paging External  0 4        Paging Group    0 8     Parallel On Off     1 0     Pickup Dialing    1 0          gt          Pickup DL Prg    Remote Timed Reminder       Room Status Ready    Station Lock   sabcabc     Station Program Clear    SWR Printout     1 0     Timed Reminder    Walking COS      gt code ext           Page E ANS 1 4    Page GRP ANS    Page Extr
62.  Confirm key programming on the Conference  button   CO in Use LR OCCUPEE The selected outside line is busy        CO Not Assigned       LR NON ASSIGNEE    The desired outside line is restricted  not  assigned         CONT RNGOFF BGM    CONT SONN N MUS    Ringer Volume is off        Contrast           CONTRAST         Display Contrast     Adjustment        Data Mode Off       PROTECTION  NON    Cancel  Data Line Security         Data Mode On                PROTECTION  OUI       Complete to set  Data Line Security         Day Mode    SERVICE DE JOUR    Day mode status   Cancel Night mode         Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service           Do Not Disturb    NE PAS DERANGER    Confirm key programming on the FWD   DND button     Complete to set  Do Not Disturb  DND          Door 1 Open    PORTE 1 OUVRIR    Complete to open the door        Doorphone 1       PORTIER TEL  1    Make or receive a doorphone call        E123  amp  CO 01    P123  amp  LR 01    Conference with an extension and CO line           E123  amp  E234       P123  amp  P234    Conference with two extensions        Enter ACCNT Code    ENTRER NO COMPTE    Pressing Account Button        Account Code Entry        Enter ID Code       ENTRER CODE ID    Enter the feature number of  CTI Code  Entry         Ext Data Clear       DONN  PST ANNUL     Execute  Station Program Clear         External BGM Off          MUS  EXT  NON       Stop BGM through external pager        Background Music  BGM      External        370    Us
63.  DPT SLT           4 4 Operator   Manager Service Features    4 4 1 Operator Manager Service Features    The system supports up to two operators and one manager  An extension assigned as the  Manager or an Operator by System Programming has the ability to perform the following  special features     a  Background Music  BGM      External  b  Call Log Lock Control  Incoming   c  Hotel Application     Room Status   d  Live Call Screening Password Control    e  Outgoing Message  OGM    f  Remote Station Lock Control   g  System Working Report   h  Timed Reminder  Remote  Wake Up Call     Programming Guide References   006  Operator   Manager Extension Assignment            Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice  Processing System  one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100      282 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 4 2 Background Music  BGM      External    Allows the Manager and the Operators to broadcast background music  BGM  in the office  through the external pagers     Setting   Canceling  7235   7436          c  Features D    Extrn BGM On Off       NEXT  A  C       Press Features  Rotate Jog Dial or press Press Extrn BGM On Off   NEXT until the following is  displayed     e Pressing this button alternates between    On    and     Off    modes       The display shows either one of the following  depending on whether the BGM is on
64.  DSS Buttons with Busy Lamp Field  BLF    Used to access extensions  The BLF indicates the busy or idle status of each extension in the  system  These buttons can also be changed to other function buttons    PF  Programmable Feature  Buttons  KX T7240 only    These buttons are provided with no default settings  With a paired telephone  you can program  the buttons as other function buttons    ANSWER Button  KX T7441 only    Used to answer an incoming call    RELEASE Button  KX T7441 only    Used to disconnect the line     User Manual 355    DSS Console Features          5 2 Station Programming    5 2 1 Station Programming Instructions    PF buttons are provided with no default settings  while each DSS button has a default setting  as follows  DSS 01 32  extension numbers 101 132  DSS 33 66  not stored     To meet your various needs  DSS buttons can be changed to other function buttons    Every DSS or PF button can be assigned to another extension number  telephone number or  feature number through Station Programming     Conditions       DSS buttons and PF buttons can be changed to any of the following feature buttons through  Station Programming        Button DSS PF    Features to be assigned       Another DSS  Direct Station Selection        Phantom Extension       ONE TOUCH  One Touch Dialing        MESSAGE  Message Waiting        MESSAGE  Another Phantom Extension        FWD DND  Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb        SAVE  Saved Number Redial        ACCOUNT  Account Code 
65.  Jan  1 03 00P                            Extension STA Speed                Features SYS Speed  Ca  Call Log  CONT RING BGM                             lt Example gt   To select 111          1234567890   111   0987654   000111222333   100200300400500  MENU CLR                                                                                        Making a call using a call log Note  1  Press the Call Log  F5  button  e To delete all numbers  press the CLR  S2   2  Press the Function button which is next to the button   desired number     To return to the initial display  press the MENU   S1  button     User Manual 323    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 6 Call Monitoring in Station Hunting  KX T7436   KX T7235    324       only     You can monitor the information of incoming outside calls waiting in the extension groups and  confirm how the calls have been treated  Up to eight extension users can monitor  simultaneously  This feature is only available for specified extensions pre assigned by System  Programming  For details  consult your manager or dealer     Monitoring    7235   7436    If you enter a group number except UCD Ring  Group   number or    0     you hear the  error tone  Re enter the proper number     While on hook          A or    c    All          Press SHIFT until Press    MNTR      Enter specific extension group Press    DISP         MNTR    is displayed  number  1 8  or   for all     lt PT Display Example gt    Group 2 Waiting 002  F   E
66.  KX T7431 and KX T7433  steps after dialing the feature number  76  of the 4 3 81    Reminder feature     User Manual    Timed    349    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           350 User Manual    DSS Console Features          Section 5    DSS Console Features    Note  All illustrations of the DPT  paired telephone   used in these operating instructions are based on model  KX 7T7235     User Manual 351    DSS Console Features          5 1 Configuration    5 1 1 Configuration    With a Directed Station Selection  DSS  Console  you can make or transfer calls and access  system features with the touch of a button  The DSS Console must be connected to the  Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System and paired with a DPT  System Programming is  required to designate the jack number of the paired PT  With a paired telephone  you can carry  out the following operations using the DSS Console     e Direct access to an extension  Direct Station Dialing    e Quick access to an outside party  One Touch Dialing    e Quick access to a system feature  One Touch Access for System Features      Easy transfer to an extension  Call Transfer     The above functions are enabled simply by pressing buttons on the console which are pre   programmed as function buttons through Station Programming     Panasonic KX T series DSS Consoles are categorized as follows        KX T7240   DSS Console  32 DSS buttons  16 PF buttons   KX T7440   DSS Console  66 DSS buttons           KX T7441  DSS Console for
67.  Line Security  4 3 44 Executive Busy Override Deny    User Manual 253    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 73 Pulse to Tone Conversion    You can change the dialing mode from Pulse to Tone temporarily to access services such as  computer telephone services  Voice Mail  etc   that require a tone     Any Telephone    phone no   Pulse mode  desired no   Tone mode           Dial the phone number Dial X    Dial the desired number   Pulse mode    Tone mode         Conditions  e You cannot change the dialing mode from Tone to Pulse     254 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 74 Quick Dialing    Allows you to make a quick dial call by dialing a pre assigned quick dial number  For example   Quick Dialing is convenient for room service calls in a hotel     Dialing    Any Telephone    R    Lift the handset or press Dial the quick dial number   SP PHONE MONITOR        Conditions  e Up to eight quick dial numbers can be stored by System Programming        You must assign a feature number in program  100  Flexible Numbering in the  programming Guide first and then a quick dial number in program  009  Quick Dial  Number Set in the Programming Guide in order for Quick Dial to be effective     e Quick Dialing is convenient for frequently dialed phone numbers     Programming Guide References   009  Quick Dial Number Set   100  Flexible Numbering    User Manual 255    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 75 Redial  Last Numb
68.  Log In Log Out 45 1 0  Message Waiting set cancel 70 1 extension no    0 extension no   Message Waiting call back 70 2  Night Service  Day   Night   Lunch   Break  78 0 3  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA  set  731 2 0  cancel  Operator Call 0  Outgoing Message  OGM  recording  36 1 OGM No   1 4   2 OGM No   1 4   playback    Outward Dialing     Line Access  Automatic  9  ARS  Outward Dialing     Outside Line Group 8 1 8  Paging     All 32   33 x  Paging     Deny set   cancel 721 1 0  Paging     External all 32 0  Paging     External particular 32 1 2  for KX TD816   1 4  for KX TD1232   Paging     External Answer TAFAS Answer 42 1 2  for KX TD816   1 4  for KX TD 1232   Paging     Group all   particular 33 0  1 8  Paging     Group Answer 43  Paralleled Telephone Connection set cancel 39 1 0  Pickup Dialing  Hot Line  assign set cancel 74 2 phone no      1 0  Redial  Last Number  for SLT     Station Program clear 790                376 User Manual    APPENDIX          Flexible Feature Numbers                                                 Feature Default Additional Digits  Station Speed Dialing 3  0 9  Station Speed Dialing programming 30  0 9  phone no      System Speed Dialing  for SLT  x 000 499  System Working Report print out   clear 794 1 0  Timed Reminder set 76 1 hhmm  0   1   0   1   Timed Reminder cancel confirm 76 0 2  Timed Reminder  Remote set 7  1 extension no     hhmm     0   1   0  1   Timed Reminder  Remote cancel confirm 1  0 extension no    2 extension no
69.  Of tg         Conditions       In Verified   All Calls mode  you must always enter a pre assigned account code when  making any of the following calls     a  Call Forwarding     to Outside Line  b  Manual Dialing  Selecting an outside line   c  One Touch Dialing  d  Pickup Dialing  Hot Line   e  Station Speed Dialing  f  System Speed Dialing     Ifyou use Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial  you do not have to re enter the  Account Code      In Option mode  it is possible to record a calling or called party   s account code in the  SMDR  during a conversation or within fifteen seconds after the other party hangs up        There is no need for an account code entry when receiving incoming calls        To clear and re enter the account code  press         e An account code can be up to 10 numeric digits  0 through 9   FLASH or FLASH RCL   PAUSE  etc  are not allowed  After entering an account code  the delimiter     or  99  must  be entered     e Memory Dialing  An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing   One Touch Dialing    System    Station Speed Dialing     The sequence to enter an account code into Memory Dialing is        Feature Number   Account Code       Line Access Code   Phone Number   or       Feature Number   Account Code   99   Line Access Code   Phone Number     User Manual 103    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt PT gt     e Pressing the Account button  flexible button  while entering an account code cancels the  entry        I
70.  Overview          BLF on DSS Button    The Busy Lamp Field  BLF  indicator button is red when the corresponding extension is busy   This is available for Direct Station Selection  DSS  buttons on DSS consoles and for flexible  CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones     LED Indication on the FWD DND Button  The table below shows the lighting patterns for the FWD DND Button                 System Programming  990    When Call Forwarding When Do Not Disturb  Area  09   Bit  4 3   FWD  is set  DND  is set  11  default  Red Slow Flashing Red On  10 Red On Red On  01 Red On Red Slow Flashing  00 Red Slow Flashing Red Slow Flashing             Programming Guide Reference   990  System Additional Information    42    User Manual    Station Programming          Section 2    Station Programming    Note  All illustrations used in this section are based on  model KX T7235     User Manual 43    Station Programming          2 1 Station Programming Instructions    2 1 1 Station Programming Instructions    44    Station Programming allows you  the proprietary telephone  PT  users  to program certain  features from your telephone individually  To program  you need to switch your telephone to  the Station Programming mode  During programming mode  your telephone is in the busy  condition to both inside and outside callers  If you want to make a normal call handling  operation  you must finish the programming mode     Programming Mode Display    When you enter into the St
71.  PT Display Example gt        Ring On                 To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     54 User Manual    Station Programming          2 2 4 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons    Allows you to assign a ringer frequency to each CO  default  tone type 2          Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      AUTO DIAL       m m tone type no              STORE    Press CO button Press the same Enter the tone type number Press STORE   which you wish to CO button again   1 through 8    change the ringing tone       The STORE indicator lights     The display shows the current   The display shows the initial  status  programming mode       The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear  the selected tone until the STORE button is pressed    lt PT Display Example gt        TORG TRS   x tone type number                 If you want to change the tone type  enter another tone type  number            To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual 55    Station Programming          2 2 5 Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls    56       Allows you to assign a ringer frequency for intercom call  default  tone type 3          Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      INTERCOM INTERCOM AUTO DIAL  i m tone type no  G      STORE    Press INTERCOM  Press INTERCOM again  Enter the tone type number Press STORE    1 t
72.  Programming     e Outside to Outside line call duration  When the  Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time  expires  both lines are  disconnected unless the caller re tries or extends the time  default  3 min   if available   A warning tone is sent at five second intervals to both parties  fifteen seconds before the  time limit     Programming Guide References    lt To enable DISA feature gt    017  DISA User Codes   407 408  DIL 1 1 Extension   809  DISA Security Type   813  Floating Number Assignment   815  DISA Built in Auto Attendant   990  System Additional Information    lt To set DISA timer values gt    202  Call Forwarding     No Answer Time   206  Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time   214  DISA Prolong Time   218  DISA AA Wait Time    lt To enable the Intercept Routing feature gt    203  Intercept Time   409 410  Intercept Extension Day   Night   990  System Additional Information       Day   Night       Features Guide References  Intercept Routing    User Manual References  44 6 Outgoing Message  OGM     170 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 37 Do Not Disturb  DND     Allows you to prevent other parties from disturbing you  Your extension will not receive  intercom and outside calls     Setting  7235   7436    Do Not Disturb  FWD DND i m    y  Gba    Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press Do Not Disturb  F2   Confirmation tone Hang up or press  press SP PHONE  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   Do N
73.  SLT           4 3 27 Call Waiting  4 3 59 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     226 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 61 Off Hook Monitor  PT only     While you are on a handset call  your call can be monitored by the others in the room through  SP PHONE   This feature is only available for the KX T7431  KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephone users     Setting    While on a handset call     SP PHONE    Press SP PHONE     e The SP PHONE indicator light turns red   e Your handset call is heard through the  SP PHONE        Switching from off hook monitor to handset call    While in the off hook monitor mode     SP PHONE    Press SP PHONE        The SP PHONE indicator light turns off   e Off hook monitor mode is canceled and  handset call mode is established        Switching from off hook monitor to hands free mode    While in the off hook monitor mode     eB  Ga    Hang up     e Off hook monitor mode is canceled and  hands free mode is established        User Manual D227    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions  e Making an OHCA call is not available if the other extension is in Off Hook Monitor mode   e This feature is only available during a conversation with the handset     Programming Guide References   148  Off Hook Monitor    User Manual References  4 3 51 Hands free Operation  PT only     228 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 62 One Touch Dialing  PT only     Allows you to make a call  i
74.  Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry    Allows you to temporarily override toll restriction and make a toll call from a toll restricted  telephone  You can carry out this feature by entering an appropriate account code before  dialing the telephone number  For operation procedure  refer to 4 3 2 Account Code Entry     Conditions       This feature changes the toll restriction level to level 2  This can be used by extension users  assigned to restriction levels 3 through 8  Levels 1 and 2 can not be changed     e A  Class of Service  which is assigned to the  Account Code Entry     Verified   Toll  Restriction Override  mode permits the class members to override their toll restrictions        Up to 128 account codes can be programmed for the Verified mode        Ifyou do not enter an account code or you enter an invalid account code  standard toll  restriction is in effect     Programming Guide References   105  Account Codes   500 501  Toll Restriction Level   508  Account Code Entry Mode   601  Class of Service       Day   Night    Features Guide References  Toll Restriction    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 2 Account Code Entry    User Manual 269    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 84 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing    Allows you to cancel toll restriction in  System Speed Dialing   Normally  calls originated by   System Speed Dialing  are restricted depending on the extension s toll restrict
75.  With the KX T7220 and KX T7250  it can also be used as the PAUSE button        User Manual 27    DPT Overview          28    REDIAL Button   Used for the Last Number Redial    SELECT Button   Used to select the displayed function or to call the displayed phone number   SHIFT Button   Used to access the second and third level of Soft Button functions    Soft  S1 through S3  Buttons   Used to perform the function or operation that appears on the bottom line of the display   SP PHONE  Speakerphone  Button   Used for a hands free speakerphone operation    TRANSFER Button   Transfers a call to another extension or external destination    VOLUME Control Button    Used to adjust the volume of the handset receiver  headset  ringer and speaker  it also adjusts  the display contrast  Refer to 1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series        User Manual    DPT Overview          Flexible Buttons    Flexible Buttons do not have specific features permanently assigned to them  Features are  assigned to Flexible Buttons through System or Station Programming   Flexible Button  Assignment  is addressed in  Station Programming   The three types of Flexible Buttons are  as follows        Flexible CO buttons  located on PT only       Flexible DSS buttons  located on DSS Console only       Programmable Feature  PF  buttons  located on DSS Console  KX T7240  only   The following table outlines the features that can be assigned to the Flexible Buttons        Button CO DSS PF  Features to be assigne
76.  as notification     e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can set or cancel this  feature using the display operation      lt 7250 gt     e A flexible button on the KX T7250  no MESSAGE button provided  can be assigned as  the MESSAGE buttons      lt SLT gt     e Single line telephone users with a message waiting lamp can activate the lamp in the  same way as a MESSAGE button on the proprietary telephone by connecting a SLT  Message Waiting Lamp Adaptor Unit  KX TD194  to the system  The message waiting  lamp lightning pattern can be selected from twelve patterns  System Programming is  required to use this feature      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   005  Flexible CO Button Assignment   130  Message Waiting Control   131  Message Waiting Lamp Assignment   132  Message Waiting Port Set   216  Message Waiting Ring Interval Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu         One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix  Section 6      212 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 57 Microphone Mute  PT only     During a conversation in the hands free mode  you can turn off your PT s microphone so that  you can consult privately with oth
77.  assigned as the MESSAGE or FWD DND button     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 8 Call Forwarding     SUMMARY  4 3 89 Voice Mail Transfer  PT only     User Manual    277    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 89    Voice Mail Transfer  PT only     You can transfer the calls to the Voice Processing System so that callers can leave their  messages in a desired extension mailbox  When you transfer the call to the designated  extension       If the extension has set the  Call Forwarding  function whose destination is Voice  Mail    The call will be forwarded to Voice Mail       If the extension has not set the  Call Forwarding  function    You can retrieve the call and then transfer the call to Voice Mail by One Touch     If the call returns to you      VM Transfer           extension no    or   phantom extension no      F O                Press Voice Mail  VM  Dial the extension number or the phantom extension number or  Transfer  flexible button   press DSS  flexible button  where you left a message notification     278          The call will be forwarded to the Voice Mail      The caller can leave the message according to  the Voice Mail guidance     Conditions    e A flexible button can be assigned as the Voice Mail  VM  Transfer button     e A user s Voice Mail Box number  password  etc  can be assigned as a Voice Mail Access  Code        Through System Programming  the  VM Command DTMF Set  and  Station Hunting  Type  must be p
78.  can select a maximum of 8 paging groups simultaneously   The announcement can only be heard through the built in speakers of PTs     To access all paging groups  1 8  simultaneously    Any Telephone    fo     Z2 GE  ar  LEN  amp  a Ea  Lift the handset or press Dial 330  Confirmation tone Announce  Wait for an answer  Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR   optional      lt PT Display Example gt              Group Page All          To access a particular paging group  Any Telephone    hy  g CO    9 a PR    Lift the handset or press Dial 33  Enter the paging group Confirmation tone Announce  Wait for Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR  number  1 through 8    optional  an answer      lt PT Display Example gt              Group Page X    E paging group number   1 through 8           Conditions    e There is a maximum of eight extension groups   Paging     Group  to different groups can  performed simultaneously        The  Paging     Group  feature overrides Do Not Disturb  DND  at an extension     User Manual 237    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 66 Paging     ANSWER    Allows you to answer an announced page at any extension within the system     Answering a page sent through a built in speaker    PT and SLT    M  ne     gt   4  3  j J  c2    Lift the handset or press Dial 43  Confirmation tone Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR   optional        Answering a page sent through a particular external pager    PT and SLT    h  pan     gt   4   2   external pager no  cy c2          Lift the han
79.  cannot hold and transfer the doorphone call      The door can be unlocked by the following   1  Extensions that are programmed to receive doorphone calls   2  Any extension that is engaged in a doorphone call      The door opener will open the door  even if a doorphone is not installed   e You can modify the door opener timer from five seconds  default  to three seconds by  System Programming    lt PT gt   e While talking to a doorphone  you can unlock the door using the one touch dialing  button instead of dialing  5   In this case   5  must be stored in the one touch dialing  button by Station or System Programming   e You can assign a ringer frequency  8 types  to each doorphone by System Programming   This is only available for DPT      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can call a doorphone  and open a door using the display operation     Programming Guide References   607 608  Doorphone Ringing Assignment       Day   Night   818  Doorphone Tone Frequency Selection    178 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            820  Doorphone Ringing Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 179    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 40    Electronic Station Lockout    Allows you to lock your extension so tha
80.  code Dial      Confirmation tone   10 digits max   0   9   and dial tone     lt PT Display Example gt   Enter ACCNT Code    phone     Press CO  Dial the phone  number     e You may dial 99 instead of                         One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix     Any Telephone     Account   For PT    f 4   4     9   For any y       telephone zy       Lift the handset or press For PT  Press Account Dial tone 3  Enter an account code Dial     SP PHONE MONITOR   flexible button    10 digits max   0   9    For any telephone  Dial 49     e If you dial a feature e You may dial 99  number  you hear no tone  Ra    co    Co     line access code phone no                       Confirmation tone Press CO or enter a line Dial the phone number   and dial tone access code   9 or 81 through 88       One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix        102 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Entering account codes during or after a conversation  During a conversation or within 15 seconds after the other party hangs up     7230   7235   7433   7436    a ee i          O   account code   52   53     Press ACCNT  S3   Enter account code Dial    Press Account Enter an account code Dial      10 digits max   0   9    flexible button    10 digits max   0   9                  e You can keep talking    You may dial 99   The corresponding e You may dial  instead of      indicator light turns on  99 instead  You can keep talking 
81.  consisting of 0 through 9         FLASH  FLASH RCL  PAUSE   INTERCOM       or       secret  and CONF    hyphen   can be stored      To store the telephone number of an outside party  the line access code  9 or 81  through 88  must be stored as the leading digit      To erase the entry  press the CLR  S2  button      To store a name  press the NEXT S3  button and go to step 3 in  To store a name   as described in the following procedure            To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual 59    Station Programming          60       To store a name      Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      7235   7436       desired name  NEXT    PT PGM Mode  mm             Press Function  F1 F10   Press NEXT  S3   Enter the name     The STORE indicator light turns off    The display shows the current status   The display shows the current status   If nothing is stored   Not Stored  is displayed     lt PT Display Example gt             Name is now  programmed      Mike Graham  CLR NEXT             AUTO DIAL    STORE    Press STORE     The STORE indicator lights   The display shows the initial  programming mode     Refer to the Combination Tables 1 and 2 in 2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name  Assignment  K X T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only  for information on how to  enter each character         To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual    Stati
82.  destination extension  is called immediately        When  One Touch Transfer  mode is disabled     During a conversation     TRANSFER  DSS     Press TRANSFER  Press DSS  flexible button         Conditions    e Automatic Disconnection  If there is no answer for 30 minutes after  Transfer Recall  starts  the line will be  disconnected       Ifthe destination extension does not answer the call within twelve rings  default    Transfer  Recall  occurs  If the transferred call is an outside call  it is possible to select whether  Transfer Recall will go to the initiating extension or to Operator 1 by System Programming    e An outside call can be translated directly to a Uniform Call Distribution  UCD  group so  that an idle extension is automatically hunted by UCD           1 One Touch Transfer allows you to hold an outside call and transfer it to an extension by pressing one key  This feature provides  automatic hold and transfer  without pressing the TRANSFER button  System Programming is required to use this function     User Manual 143    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt PT gt     The destination extension shows the Caller ID and the extension number from where the  call was transferred on the display    lt Example gt  The Caller ID number  123456789  is transferred from extension 101     MOL 2123456 713 9                 The priority of the display is    Caller ID name  gt  Caller ID number  gt  Outside line name  gt  Blank  if none of these is  assigned
83.  dial tone     lt PT Display Example gt   FWD  NA  Extxxxx      y  G Wa   extension number where    the call is to be forwarded                Hang up or press  SP PHONE     The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly     PT and SLT    FWD DND  For PT    S A         7  L 1 l o  For PT  SLT  a   extension no       Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  Dial 4  Enter the destination Confirmation  or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  extension number  tone and  SP PHONE MONITOR  dial tone       e You may press the flexible button assigned as  the FWD DND button instead    lt PT Display Example gt   E FWD  NA  Extxxxx    y  Ghd extension number where    the call is to be forwarded                   Hang up or press AIN    SP PHONE MONITOR     The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly        118 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions       The number of rings before a call is forwarded can be changed for each extension  except  ISDN extensions   T1 extensions  with program   619  Extension Call Forwarding     No  Answer Time   If   619  Extension Call Forwarding     No Answer Time  is not set   program   202  Call Forwarding     No Answer Time  will be used     Programming Guide References   202  Call Forwarding     No Answer Time   619  Extension Call Forwarding     No Answer Time    User Manual 119    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 12 Call Forwarding     Busy   No Answer    You can forward your calls to another exte
84.  group  Calls to an UCD group search for an idle extension in a circular way  If all  extensions in an UCD group are busy or not available  the incoming outside call will be  handled by the UCD Table     Conditions   e UCD can be used in the following cases   a  The floating number   of UCD is assigned as the Direct In Lines  DIL  1 1 destination   b  The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Direct Inward Dialing  DID  destination   c  The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination   d  The floating number of UCD is dialed from an extension   e  The floating number of UCD is dialed from DISA  Direct Inward System Access    f  The floating number of UCD is assigned as the UCD Overflow destination    e Itis possible to set the log in or log out status on an extension basis     Programming Guide References   106  Station Hunting Type   122  UCD Overflow   123  UCD Time Table   813  Floating Number Assignment   991  COS Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 55 Log In   Log Out            A Floating Number  FN  is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension  For more details  please consult with  your dealer     274 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 88 Voice Mail Integration    Allows you to have your calls forwarded to your Voice Processing System mailbox  If your  telephone has a MESSAGE button  the button light turns on and lets you know you have  messages  Even if you do not ha
85.  he she is absent will not be forwarded back to the original extension        Confirmation tone  Confirmation tone 2  two beeps  is sent when the previously programmed data is same as  the new data  If it is not  confirmation tone 1  one beep  is sent  Refer to the  Tone List  in  the Appendix    e You can call the original extension from the Call Forwarding destination extension   Boss  Secretary     lt PT gt      Both the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb  DND  functions can be programmed at   the same time  but either one of them can be activated at a time     e You can enable or disable the Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb  DND  function by  pressing the FWD DND button while on hook  If you set both Call Forwarding and  DND  alternating the mode is also available by pressing the FWD DND button  In this  case  pressing the button changes the setting as follows     foe     gt  FWD Seer     The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows   Off  Both functions are canceled   Red on   DND mode      Red flash   FWD mode        e With the KX T7436 and KX T7235  you can set or cancel the Call Forwarding features  using the display operation    lt 7250 gt       FWD DND button  A flexible button on the KX T7250  no FWD DND button provided  can be assigned to  a flexible  CO  DSS  PF  button by Station  User or System Programming      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment 
86.  kL 5   mMNnoG amp   prs 7    tuv 8   wxy9  SELECT     joPpeRO      PREV FLASH END NEXT   l                            70          KX T7436             00000       Soft 1  C J    Soft 2      J    Soft 3      J                   Ia          Ja          Ja            C r                SECRET                C Jt J  C J      PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR  J De L         i    JE            PREV                   STORE             FLASH RCL SELECT              js  as          KX T7235                                                                                        S   zm E  co SS  co co  co   amme    Cc        PROGRAM SHIFT    Es  Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3  A A A  a ey  ja  JEE y E i EE g  J  0 i   a  a Ja JO 1a Ja J  SECRET        PAUSE CLEAR  a 1 a 1a 1a   E   a J   1 ABC 2    DEF 3 a    VOLUME  GHI 4    KL 5    mno 6 v  STORE  prs 7    tuv 8   wx 9      SELECT       oPeR0   oa  PREV FLASH END NEXT  cet                                     User Manual    User Programming          Before entering the user programming mode  Before entering the user programming mode  confirm that   e Your telephone is on hook  and  e No calls are on hold at your telephone     Entering the user programming mode  To enter the User Programming mode        Press PROGRAM          User Programming Password  default  1234                 The display shows the Initial Message  USR PGM NO   gt     e Ifnothing is entered within five seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed   programming mode is canceled        Duri
87.  new programmed numbers if default feature numbers are changed by  System Programming       For proprietary telephone operations  all button illustrations are based on the model KX   T7235     Description of Symbols Used    In this section  many symbols are used  Most symbols do not need a description  but some  symbols do  They are as follows      gt     Lift the handset  or press the SP PHONE or MONITOR button   Off hook         GL    Replace the handset  or press the SP PHONE or MONITOR button   On hook     User Manual 93    94    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           qy    4     RAN    Flash the hookswitch on a single line telephone     Tones which vary depending on the condition  Refer to 6 1 3 Tone List      User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 2 Basic Operations    4 2 1 Making Calls    Intercom Calling    You can make a call to another extension     Any Telephone    extension no    or re c2 cba          Lift the handset or press Dial extension number  Press DSS   SP PHONE MONITOR  Talk  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        The INTERCOM indicator light turns green        Outward Dialing  You can make a call to an outside party using one of the following line access methods   a  Line Access  Automatic  default  9   b  Line Access  Individual  CO button   c  Line Access  Outside Line Group  default  81 through 88     Any Telephone     CO     U   For PT  i   Phone no   2    or any phone no  4  line access code telephone A    
88.  no   Dial extension number     At Ext           Enter hour  00 through 23  and minute  00 through 59      Back at       time        Enter month  01 through 12  and day  01 through 31      Out Until        month day        In a Meeting None        Programmable      Programmable         Programmable     ele E el lel E 1        Note  Enter the desired value in the     space  You must make an entry in all of the  s using 0  through 9      or  X      User Manual 99    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling the absent message    Any Telephone    A na     tY Gba  Lift the handset or press Dial 7500  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt              Message Cancel          Conditions      All nine messages can be programmed either by User or System Programming    lt display PT gt       The message you select is shown on the display of your PT whenever you go off hook   e Regarding Message 3   a  If the extension number you want to enter has more than the number of     characters   refer to System Programming to change the setting   b  If the extension number you want to enter has less than the number of     characters   fill the remaining     characters with     or  X         With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Programming Guide References   008  Absent Messages    User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Displa
89.  or off   lt PT Display Example gt        ternal BGM On     BGMison             Confirmation tone Hang up or press p  SP PHONE  Exi BGM Off       BGM is off                               User Manual 283    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Setting   Canceling    Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until   Feature Access  is  Ext BGM On Off  is    displayed  displayed     y  Ghd  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE        Press SHIFT until Press FEAT    FEAT  is displayed     y  6a  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE     284     gt  Ext BGM On Off    SELECT MODE     co    Press SELECT     e Pressing this button alternates between  On  and   Off  modes    e The display shows either one of the following  depending on whether the BGM is on or off   lt PT Display Example gt        T  EX    ternal    BGM On           BGM is on                         BGM Off           BGM is off       Rotate Jog Dial until   Ext BGM On Off  is    displayed     7 Ext BGM On oft  Extrn MODEM ELD  MENU SEL   ed ce fo       Press SEL     e Pressing this button alternates between  On  and   Off  modes    e The display shows either one of the following  depending on whether the BGM is on or off   lt PT Display Example gt        T  EX    ternal    BGM On           BGM is on                               Ff           BGM is off          User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Setting   Canceling    Any Telephone    hy _  C pd    amp  GIs 9 ab    Lift
90.  or parked call              No Incoming Call          AUCUN APPEL ENT     There is no incoming call when trying to pick  up the call                          Not Valid NON VALIDE Illegal operation   OGM 1 Play 28 REP 1  LECT  28 When playing back the OGM   OGM 1 Rec 12 REP 1 ENP 12 When recording back the OGM        Out Until 12 12    Out Until 12 12    Absent Message 5        Paging Deny Off    APPEN GEN  NON    Cancel  Paging     DENY         Paging Deny On       APPEN GEN  OUI    Complete to set  Paging     DENY         Parallel Off       PARALLELE   NON       Cancel  Paralleled Telephone Connection                  Parallel On                PARALLELE  OUI       Complete to set  Paralleled Telephone  Connection         Park at 0 N A    ATT  A 0 N VAL    Not complete to set  Call Park         PT PGM Mode    TP MODE PROG    Entered the Station Programming mode        RCL  Tony Viola    RAPL  Tony Viola    Called by transfer recall  with name       Call  Transfer           RCL  Ext 1234             RAPL PST 1234       Called by transfer recall  without name        Call Transfer        372    User Manual          APPENDIX                English Display French Display Description  Restricted RESTREINT An outgoing call is restricted   Ringer moni SONN  KAR Volume Control     ringer on idle status        SPikxxxenxeKK exe    HPs    x   KKKKKKKKKK    Volume Control     speaker on hands free  mode        Transfer to CO    TRANSFERT A LR    The destination extension is set  Call  
91.  seconds     When the volume level is 0  no     is indicated      lt PT Display Example gt     Ringer        volume level 3        7420   7425    Adjust the RINGER Volume Selector lever to  the desired setting  OFF LOW HIGH      To adjust the speaker volume    GO     SP PHONE  Press SP PHONE  Rotate Jog Dial in the  desired direction      lt PT Display Example gt   gp pakk kkk         volume level 12              You may also adjust the speaker volume while listening to  background music  BGM On mode   receiving a voice call   receiving a page or hearing a call progress tone such as a dial tone     User Manual          35    DPT Overview          Conditions     Ifthe ringer volume of the KX T7431 is set to OFF  the display while on hook is as  follows        Ring Orr 123002       e By pressing       the display changes to show your extension number and name              LOLS Jonim Sianaiicin       36 User Manual    DPT Overview          1 1 6 Initial Setting for KX T7200 Series    Display Contrast Adjustment  KX T7230 and KX T7235 only     A Soft button and the VOLUME Control button are used to adjust the display contrast  The  contrast level is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks  You can adjust the contrast  level under the following conditions     a  When on hook  or    b  During an outside intercom call     7230   7235    CONT                Press CONT  S1   Press VOLUME  UPA  DOWN v  Control button      lt PT Display Example gt     Contrast              c
92.  the assigned data on the Flexible button      Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      A    Press the desired Flexible Press HOLD  END     CO DSS PF  button     e The display shows the current status    The display shows the initial programming mode            To exit Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset       If you wish to change the data  follow the programming procedure explained in this section     Clearing the data on the Flexible button      Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      AUTO DIAL  oo   2    Oo _      STORE    Press the desired Flexible Press STORE    CO  DSS  PF  button that  you wish to clear       The STORE indicator lights     The display shows the initial programming mode            To exit Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset         The lists on the following pages are the buttons and programming access numbers used for  Station Programming  Detailed operating instructions are explained on each page in this  section     User Manual 47    Station Programming          Station Programming  Flexible Button Assignment              PROGRAM H 9   9                                                        Station Programming   1   Direct Station Selection  DSS  Button  2   One Touch Dialing Button  fede   Message Waiting  MESSAGE  Button  4   FWD DND Button  5  6                                     SAVE Button   Account Button   7
93.  the handset or press Dial 35  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  SP PHONE MONITOR        The display shows either one of the following  depending on whether the BGM is on or off    lt PT Display Example gt     External BGM On     BGMison                   or    External BGM Off      BGM is off                         Conditions      To make BGM External possible  you must enable BGM and select a music source in  313   ARS Time  System Programming         External Pager Priority  Priority of access to external pager is   1  TAFAS   2  Paging   3  BGM  Higher priorities will override the BGM       The default is  External BGM Off      Programming Guide References   803  Music Source Use   804  External Pager BGM   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 6 Background Music  BGM   PT only     User Manual 285    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 4 3 Call Log Lock Control  Incoming    The Manager and the Operators can cancel the  Call Log Lock  Incoming  feature set at any  other extension     Programming    PROGRAM x  extension no    or  e    e  ele  Lo lL2  Lx      Press PROGRAM  Dial 99  Dial 02  Dial the extension number or X       extension number to clear one extension      X    to clear all extensions    e You are in the Station  Programming mode   lt PT Display Example gt   lt PT Display Example gt      lt PT Display Example gt     EXT No    1234 Unlock                    PT   PGM Mode       AUTO DIAL PROGRAM  
94.  to  background music  BGM On mode   receiving a voice call   receiving a page or hearing a call progress tone such as a dial tone        User Manual    DPT Overview          1 1 7 LED Indication    The Light Emitting Diode  LED  buttons indicate the line conditions with lighting patterns     Flashing light patterns    Slow flashing   60 flash min     Moderate flashing     120 flash min  LI     a    s        Rapid flashing   240 flash min        LED Indication on the INTERCOM Button  The table below shows the lighting patterns for intercom line conditions           Green slow flashing  Green moderate flashing       Green rapid flashing       INTERCOM button Intercom Line Condition  Off Idle  Green On Intercom call   Conference established    Intercom call hold  Intercom call exclusive hold   Consultation hold  Incoming intercom doorphone call          LED Indication on the CO Button  The table below shows the lighting patterns for CO line conditions           Green rapid flashing    Red On  Red slow flashing          CO Button Outside Line Condition  Off Idle  Green On You are using the line   Green slow flashing You have a held call   Green moderate flashing You have one of the following    1  Exclusive hold      2  Outside to Outside line call  or    3  Conference  unattended   Privacy Release possible    Hold Recall    Incoming call   Other use   Log out   Other hold               Items marked with     are only available on the Single CO button     User Manual    41    DPT
95.  to any other mode  However  from night mode   you can only go to day mode     e You can assign the Extension  Voice Mail  Phantom Extension  DISA  Extension Group   TAFAS or Modem as the DIL 1 1 destination in program  467 468  when a call is received  in the lunch break mode  If you have assigned  Disable  in this program  the call is  forwarded to the destination assigned in program  457 458   You can assign a lunch break  group as the DIL 1 1 destination in program  457 458      e Class of Service  Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature        The Day Lunch Break Night mode is automatically switched at a predetermined time   default  9 00 a m  for all days of the week  12 00 p m      12 59 p m  for lunch   3 00 p m      3 29 p m  for break  5 00 p m  for all nights of the week  if automatic switching  mode is selected in System Programming      lt PT gt   e A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as the Night button     Programming Guide References   101  Day   Night Service Switching Mode   102  Day   Night Service Starting Time   150  Lunch Service Starting   Ending Time   151  Break Service Starting   Ending Time   457 458  DIL 1 1     Lunch   Break Group   467 468  DIL 1 1 Extension        Lunch   Break   510  Night Service Access   620  Lunch   Break Group Assignment    Features Guide References  Direct Inward Dialing  DID     User Manual 217    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           218    Direct In Lines
96.  two different DISA messages    Timed Reminder  wake up  message    This message is used in Timed Reminder  When answering the Timed Reminder alarm   often used as a wake up call   the extension user will hear this message  There is only one  Timed Reminder message    UCD  Uniform Call Distribution  message    This message is played to the outside callers in conjunction with UCD feature  There are  four different UCD messages           1 Available for the KX TD1232 only    User Manual    291    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Recording a message  7235   7436  D  D    Cc  Features NEXT c  OGM Recording   gt 1 4     A  Cc    Press Features  Rotate Jog Dial or press Press OGM Recording  NEXT until the following is  displayed     hj  pa  2 AUTO DIAL  a  a _  STORE  Enter OGM number Confirmation tone Record a message  Press STORE or wait until a     1 through 4   maximum recording time  has elapsed      lt PT Display Example gt     The recording is stopped and STORE  indicator light turns steady red   OGM 2 Rec   00 a          The recorded message will be played  back automatically         seconds  x  OGNieaumber  lt PT Display Example gt     ene 4  OGM 2 Play 28      Time counter             e The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly  Recording starts after the confirmation tone       AUTO DIAL d man    v  Soe Glia    Confirmation tone Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone Hang up or press  playback is finished  SP PHONE        The STORE indicator ligh
97. 0   Conference  CONF  Button  L  71   Log In   Log Out Button                                  72   Phantom Extension Button  73 Night Button  HO 8   Voice Mail  VM  Transfer Button  90   Two Way Record Button    L 91   Two Way Transfer Button      92   Live Call Screening  LCS  Buttont  93   Live Call Screening  LCS  Cancel Button     0   Single CO  S CO  Button      Loop CO  L CO  Button      Group CO  G CO  Button   Ringing Tone Selection for CO Button                                                                                                                        Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls                   Phantom  Phantom    Phantom Extension Ringing On Off Set                    H  Station Speed Dialing Number   Name Assignment           CO  LDSS  PF   Co Hco   INT H INT  Function   FI   F10      KX 17235 KX 17431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only   PROGRAM    Exit                    t  Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic    Voice Processing System  one that supports digital propr     48    ietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100      User Manual    Station Programming          Station Programming  Function Assignment     PROGRAM 9 9             _       Wii                       Preferred Line Assignment     Outgoing            Preferred Line Assignment     Incoming         Full One Touch Dialing Assignment    Intercom Alert Assignment            Call Waiting Tone Type Assignmen
98. 10 characters     e For entering characters  see Section 2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name  Assignment  KX T7235 K X T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only      e Program  003  Extension Number Set is used to assign extension numbers     User Manual 87    User Programming             For the KX TD1232  Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through  64 are for the Slave  if available     e For an explanation of jack numbering  see  3 1 2 Programming Methods      User Manual References  4 3 52 Intercom Calling  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    88 User Manual    User Programming          3 2 6  017  DISA User Codes    Description  Assigns the Direct Inward System Access  DISA  User Codes and a Class of Service  COS  to  each code  The code COS determines the toll restriction level of the DISA caller     Warning   When you enable the Outside Outside Line Call feature of DISA function  if a third party  discovers the password  a DISA User Code  of the system  you have a risk that they will make  illegal phone calls using your telephone line  and the cost may be charged to your account   In order to avoid this problem  we strongly recommend the following points     1  Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password   2  Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it   3  Change the password frequently     Selection  e DISA user code number  01 through 3
99. 2     DISA user code  4 through 10 digits     COS number  1 through 8    Default  All DISA user code numbers   DISA user code Blank  COS number 8    User Manual 89    User Programming          Programming    Display PT    Dial 017  Press NEXT  Enter a DISA user code number  01 32          lt PT Display gt   lt PT Display gt  e To enter user code number 01  you  can also press NEXT   017 USER CODE User Code NOT  lt PT Display Example gt                                                       Repeat these steps       gt   DISA d ro    user code COS no    Enter a DISA user Press     gt   Enter COS Press STORE  Enter the desired  code  Blank or 4 10 number  1 8   a DISA user code number     I   lt To continue  gt   When SELECT is pressed             NEXT   pisa user code no        SELECT       e To delete the current entry  press CLEAR   e To change the current entry  press CLEAR  and enter the new name     Press NEXT or  PREV or SELECT     I  I  I  I  I  I  i  digits   i  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I  I     lt To end  gt     END    C     Press END        Conditions     This setting is required if Trunk  Outside line  Security mode is selected in program  809   DISA Security Type      Each code should be unique and composed of four through ten numerical digits  0 through  9     User Manual References  4 3 36 Direct Inward System Access  DISA     90 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT        Section 4    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT     User Manual 91    Stat
100. 2    User Manual       Index       Section 7    Index    383    Index          A    Absent Message Capability 98   ACCOUNT 29   Account Code Entry 101   Alternate Calling     Ring   Voice 105   ANSWER 355   ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation  365   Answering  Direct Outside Line 107   AUTO ANSWER MUTE 26   AUTO DIAL STORE 26   Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On  108    B    Background Music  BGM  111   Background Music  BGM      External 283  Bilingual Display Selection 51  368   BSS   OHCA   Whisper OHCA 112  148  222  Busy Station Signaling  BSS  112    C    Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb 313   Call Forwarding     All Calls 116   Call Forwarding     Busy 117   Call Forwarding     Busy   No Answer 120   Call Forwarding     CANCEL 126   Call Forwarding     Follow Me 124   Call Forwarding     No Answer 118   Call Forwarding     SUMMARY 114   Call Forwarding     to Outside Line 122   Call Hold 128   Call Hold Retrieve 132   Call Hold  Exclusive 130   Call Log Lock Control  Incoming 286   Call Log Lock  Incoming 321   Call Log  Incoming 315   Call Log  Outgoing 323   Call Monitoring in Station Hunting 324   Call Park 134   Call Pickup Deny 139   Call Pickup  Directed 136   Call Pickup  Group 137   Call Pickup  Outside Line 138   Call Splitting 140   Call Transfer 364   Call Transfer     to Extension 142   Call Transfer     to Outside Line 145   Call Waiting 147  222   Call Waiting from Central Office 150   Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment 51   Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
101. 232  On hook     0  All external pagers   4  Glia    335    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Seventh Display          PREV  Cc    MENU                                        Seventh Display     31 0     gt         Remote Timed Reminder  Room Status Ready    Pickup Dialing    Hot Line    Stores the number to call a  party by going off hook and  sets or cancels this feature              Pickup Dialing             Pickup DL Prg                                           S  Timed Reminder   Remote    Wake Up Call    operator manager only   Refer to the  corresponding feature   in Section 4 4     Operator   Manager  Service Features               l Set   Cancel   l Store         Dial 1 or 0       1  Set  On     0  Cancel  Off     336    Enter phone  number and       000  000    oo  o    On hook     Hotel Application      Room Status    Changes the room  status at a telephone in  a guest room                       Station Lock   gt abcabc   MENU PREV NEXT    l See the next page                                                 Electronic  Staiton Lockout  Denies or allows    other people from  using your telephone              Enter lock code   000 through 999        twice  to deny    once  to allow    On hook     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Eighth Display       Station Feature Clear    Clears the features set at  your telephone        On hook   g   3    Gw       System Working  Report   operator man
102. 263  43 81  Timed Reminder oeenn eee E nt E SE E EE E E aaae 265  4 3 82 Toll Restriction Override     SUMMARY      ceccecccccceessestecseceeceeeecneeeeeesseeseesseens 268  4 3 83 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry         cccccccccesseeseceseeseeseeneenseens 269  4 3 84 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing    ccc eccsceeseesseeeeetteeteees 270  4 3 85 Trunk Answer From Any Station  TAFAS  0    cccccccssccsseceteceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeneeessens 271  4 3 86 Two Way Recording into Voice Mail  PT only           cccccecceescesseeereeeteeeteeeseeeteeenees 272  4 3 87 Uniform Call Distribution  UCD   0      cc eccececsccesseeneeeseenseceseceseceseeeeeeeseeeseeneeessees 274  4 3 88 Voice Mail Integration    ccceeccesseeseesseesseeseceseceeeceseeeseenseecsaecseenseeseeeseeeseeeeeeaees 275  4 3 89 Voice Mail Transfer  PT only          c ccccccescceseesseceseeeeeeseeseeeeecsecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaees 278  4 390     WANK I SCS va rises onita vais asian e o tanta sah a r E E E 280  4 4 Operator   Manager Service Features              ccsccccsscscscesseccssssssssssscccsssseeesseessseseees 282  4 4 1 Operator Manager Service Features          ccccccesccescesseeseeesececeeseeeecnsaeceeeseeeeeeeeseeensees 282  4 4 2 Background Music  BGM      External           cccccecccecseeseeeteceteceeeeneeeeeeeseeeseeneeesaees 283  4 4 3 Call Log Lock Control  Incoming           ceeccecceesseeceneeesceeeeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeneeesaees 286  4 4 4 Hotel Application     Room Sta
103. 6 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 135    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 20 Call Pickup  Directed    Allows you to answer an incoming call ringing at any other extension     Any Telephone        gt   4 lla     Lift the handset or press Dial 41  Dial the extension Confirmation tone Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR  number where the  optional   call is ringing        Conditions    e Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer  doorphone calls        Confirmation tone  A confirmation tone is audible when the call is picked up  Eliminating the tone is  programmable     e Ifyou receive a call waiting tone during a conversation  you may ask a third party to pick  up your second call by Directed Call Pickup      lt PT gt      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 23 Call Pickup Deny  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    136 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 21 Call Pickup  Group    Allows you to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone within your extension group     PT and SLT    N fo     ae Y    Lift the handset or press Dial 40  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR   optional      
104. 7431   KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call    Directory    There are three Call Directory features as follows        Feature    Description    Condition       Extension Dialing    You can make an intercom call  using the directory        System Speed Dialing    You can make a call to a party  stored in the system using the  directory     Only items which have a name  assigned are displayed in  alphabetical order        Station Speed Dialing          You can make a call to a party  stored in your phone       Items which have a name assigned  are displayed by priority in stored  order  If a name is not assigned   the number is displayed  The  displaying mode  name or number   can be assigned in System  Programming           To use the Call Directory  you may shift the display to the Jog Dial Operation display by  pressing the SHIFT or MODE button first  Then follow the procedures on the following pages     Programming Guide References   001  System Speed Dialing Number Set     002   003   004   012   013   990      ari a ate a a a a e aer    System Speed Dialing Name Set  Extension Number Set  Extension Name Set   ISDN Extension Number Set  ISDN Extension Name Set  System Additional Information    User Manual References    2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 only     3 2 2  001  System Speed Dialing Number Set  3 2 3  002  System Speed Dialing Name Set  3 2 4  003  Extension Number Set   3 2 5  004  Extension Name Se
105. AUTO DIAL STORE  Enter the system speed dial number  SP PHONE MONITOR  For SLT and ISDN telephone  Dial X    000 through 499         The AUTO DIAL STORE indicator lights     The AUTO DIAL STORE indicator  e No tone is heard  light turns off        Conditions    e System Speed Dial numbers must be stored either by the User  Manager  or System  Programming     e Itis possible to cancel toll restriction with this feature  Toll Restriction Override for System  Speed Dialing   In this case  System Programming is necessary      lt PT gt     e  Speed Dialing    One Touch Dialing    Redial  Last Number Saved Number  and  manual dialing can be used together        Continuous use of a speed dial number is possible  if the number is divided when stored    lt Example gt   If the number is divided and stored in System Speed Dial numbers 001 and 002   Press   AUTO DIAL STORE   0   0   1   AUTO DIAL STORE   0   0   2        The dialed number appears on the display     e You may press a CO button to select a desired outside line before pressing the AUTO  DIAL STORE button     e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Programming Guide References   001  System Speed Dialing Number Set   002  System Speed Dialing Name Set    User Manual 263    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           User Manual References  3 2 2  001  System Speed Dialing Number Set  3 2 3  002  System Speed Dialing Name Set  4 3 84 Toll Restric
106. Available for KX TD1232 only     User Manual    167    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Calling an outside party    From Outside Telephone    In Non Security Mode        h    i p     Dial the DISA Ringback tone DISA outgoing Enter a line access code Dial the phone number  phone number  message  9 or 81 through 88   of the outside party     In Outside Line Security Mode   ho A    di  DISA phone no  v          f     a py 2  v line acccess code DISA user code phone no     Dial the DISA Ringback tone DISA outgoing Enter a line access Enter the pre assigned Dial the phone  phone number  message code DISA user code  number of the   9 or 81 through 88   outside party     In All Security Mode        l  Gh  wy    DISA user code   line acccess code   phone no           Dial the DISA Ringback tone DISA outgoing Enter the pre assigned Enter a Dial the phone  phone number  message DISA user code  line access code number of the   9 or 81 through 88   outside party        Extending the call duration while calling an outside line    From Outside Telephone    When you make a call to any outside line using the DISA feature  the line is disconnected  after a preprogrammed time  default  10 min   However  you can prolong your call by  pressing a key  Your call is prolonged by a preprogrammed period of time  default  3min      You prolong a call an infinite number of times by default  this can be limited to ten times         any key except  3         Dial any key except  x   afte
107. Buttons Operation  KX T7441  only     The DSS Console for Attendant KX T7441 is provided with the ANSWER button and the  RELEASE button which are useful for operators who use headsets    For other DSS Consoles  ANSWER button and RELEASE button can be assigned to a DSS or  PF button    With the ANSWER button  you can answer all incoming calls to the paired telephone    With the RELEASE button  you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or  complete a Call Transfer     Answering a call    DSS Console    ANSWER  e You can talk to the caller either with    the handset or in the hands free  mode   Press ANSWER        Call Transfer  PT and DSS Console    During a conversation with the headset or in the hands free mode      Paired telephone   DSS Console   DSS Console     RELEASE  TRANSFER  DSS     C C or   extension no     Press TRANSFER  Press the desired DSS button or Press RELEASE   enter the desired extension number        One Touch Transfer  PT and DSS Console    During a conversation with the headset or handset     RELEASE   DSS     Press the desired DSS button  Press RELEASE     e The other party is placed on hold and the  destination is called immediately        User Manual 365    DSS Console Features          Programming Guide References   108  Automatic Hold by CO   DSS Button    366 User Manual    APPENDIX       Section 6    APPENDIX    User Manual 367    APPENDIX          6 1 APPENDIX    6 1 1 Display Examples    Due to the Bilingual Display Selection Fe
108. ERCOM indicator light flashes green slowly        Conditions     This feature can be enabled to any PTs  other than KX T7400 series PT  by System  Programming        Ifthe Whisper OHCA sender does not use a KX T7400 series telephone  Whisper OHCA  works as OHCA  If the receiver does not use a KX T7400 series telephone  Whisper OHCA  may not work properly   e g   the announcement may be heard by the other party      e Class of Service programming determines which extension can perform Whisper OHCA        The Whisper OHCA receiving extension display shows the calling extension s number or  name for 5 seconds in 10 second intervals     e You can select to receive a Call Waiting tone  OHCA  Whisper OHCA or none of these at  your extension        The receiving mode may shift depending on the setting on each telephone or the telephone  type    lt Example gt  If the user selects 3  Whisper OHCA mode       If using a KX TD7436 handset  Whisper OHCA      If using a KX TD7436 SP PHONE  Call Waiting      Other  Call Waiting     The Whisper OHCA sender will receive a ringback tone in the following cases       If the receiver presses the TRANSFER  CONF  SP PHONE  DSS or CO button         If the party who is talking with the receiver disconnects the line or presses the  TRANSFER  CONF or HOLD button     Programming Guide References   509  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     User Manual References  4 3 7 Busy Station Signaling  BSS     User Manual 225    Station Features and Operation  DPT
109. Entry        CONF  Conference        Voice Mail  VM  Transfer       Two Way Record        Two Way Transfer        LCS  Live Call Screening         LCS  Live Call Screening  Cancel        QL FQ EQN FQ FREQ EQ ERENQ ENQIPNREQ YS  QV I NS NEN US    Night Day  Lunch Break  Service                   356 User Manual    DSS Console Features            Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary  Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System  one that supports digital  proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100       WW  indicates that the feature is available        When the STORE button is pressed after programming  you will hear beep tones as follows       One beep  The entry is changed from one that was stored previously       Two beeps  The entry is the same as on stored previously     Programming Guide References   007  DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment    User Manual 357    DSS Console Features          5 2 2 Extension Number Assignment    You can assign the desired extension number to a DSS button         Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      PT and DSS Console     DSS Console   Paired telephone   Paired telephone      DSS     Cl   1   extension no     Press the desired Enter the desired    DSS button  extension number      lt PT Display Example gt        EXT                  lt PT Display Example gt     
110. FWD DND  Dial 0  Confirmation Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  For PT  SLT  Dial 710  tone and SP PHONE MONITOR   dial tone          e You may press the flexible button  lt PT Display Example gt        assigned as the FWD DND button  instead           FWD DND Cancel          The FWD DND indicator light turns off        126 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling Call Forwarding at the destination extension      Follow Me  All Calls   only    FWD From Cancel  ext  FWD DND NEXT 7  our extension no   O y    Lift the handsetor Press FWD DND  Press NEXT  S3   Press FWD From Dial you extension  press SP PHONE  Cancel  F4   number     7235   7436          g  lt PT Display Example gt   GWs FWD Cancel Exxxx      your extension number                    Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and dial tone SP PHONE    The FWD DND indicator light on your own extension    turns off     PT and SLT       FWD DND M  m   For PT q    die    Lift the handset or press For PT  Press FWD DND  Dial 8  Dial your Confirmation    SP PHONE MONITOR  For PT  SLT  Dial 710  extension number  tone and  dial tone             e You may press the flexible  lt PT Display Example gt   button assigned as the  FWD DND button instead           FWD Cancel EXXXX                your extension number     g   The FWD DND indicator light on your own  G IRR  d extension turns off     Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        User Manual 127    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT    
111. Forwarding     to Outside Line         Unlocked       DEVERROUILLE    Cancel  Call Log Lock  Incoming    Cancel  Electronic Station Lockout            Will Return Soon          Will Return Soon          Absent Message 1          Provides you with a caller   s information  such as his her name and telephone number  on the outside line assigned to receive  Caller ID service calls  This requires a subscription for caller identification services  For more details  please consult with    your dealer     Examples     in Station Programming mode             English Display French Display Description  Account COMP TE Account button is assigned   C W  Tonel TON APPEL1 Select Call Waiting tone        Clear Ready     ANNULER DONNEES     Available to clear Station Programming data        CO 01    LR O1    Single CO  S CO  button is assigned        Conference    CONFERENCE    Conference  CONF  button is assigned        140 CO Lock    140 LR VERR     Complete to lock the outside calls of other  extension          Remote Station Lock Control                                                                           140 ICM Lock 140  INTCM VERR  Complete to lock the intercom calls of other  extension         Remote Station Lock Control    140 Unlock 140 DEVERR Cancel  Remote Station Lock Control   Ext 123 PST 123 DSS button is assigned    FWD  DND RNV NPD FWD DND button is assigned   Hands free Off MAINS LIB  NON Disable  Full One Touch Dialing  mode   Hands free On MAINS LIB   OUI Enable  Fu
112. Fourth Display        abcabc    gt  abcabc    LCS Password        31 0      t     Log Lock Call  Log Ovrt On Off                                                 Login Logout  Message Off       MENU PREV NEXT                                  l See the next page             Log In   Log Out    Joins or Leaves the  call receiving group        Dial 1 or 0     000  F      1  overwrite  On     0  disregard He f     On hook       L      GW    Dial 1 or 0       1  Log In  On     0  Log Out  Off     7  Message Waiting    Leaves a message  notification     N          Cancel    Dial extension  number     333    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Fifth Display       Message Waiting    Leaves a message  notification                Dial extension  number        Night Day  Lunch   Break  Service   operator manager     pre assigned  extension only     Changes the  day night mode              334    Dial 0   3      0  Day     1  Night     2  Lunch    3  Break    On hook     Gla    Outgoing  Message  OGM      operator manager only     Refer to the  corresponding feature  in Section 4 4    Operator   Manager  Service Features            co MENU    PREV       NEXT                                     Fifth Display                                        MENU    Message On  Night Mode  OGM Playback  OGM Recording    Page Deny On Of    PREV                                                             Paging      DENY    Denies or allows  being paged        Dial 1 or 0  
113. ITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        All Call Page                Paging     External    Allows you to make a voice announcement over external pagers     To access all external pagers  Any Telephone  S  EY    Lift the handset or press Dial 320  Confirmation tone Announce  Wait for  SP PHONE MONITOR   optional  an answer      lt PT Display Example gt        Extrnl Page All                   User Manual 235    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To access a particular pager    Any Telephone     lt  Po te e2       3   2   external pager no  J  z   A H    Lift the handset or press Dial 32  Dial external pager Confirmation Announce  Wait for Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR  number  1 for KX TD816  tone  optional  an answer           1 through 4 for KX TD1232       lt PT Display Example gt           Extrnl Page X  L    external pager number                Conditions     Ifthe designated pager is in use  a busy tone is heard   e The paging priorities are as follows   a  TAFAS  Trunk Answer From Any Station   b  Paging     External  c  Background Music  BGM      External    Ifa higher priority page is requested when a lower priority page is active  the higher priority  overrides the lower one     User Manual References  4 4 2 Background Music  BGM      External  4 3 85 Trunk Answer From Any Station  TAFAS     236 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Paging     Group  You can make a paging announcement by selecting a particular paging group   You
114. If one party in a conversation goes on hook  they both are disconnected from the speech path  automatically  A reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before it is disconnected  No  operation is necessary     206 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 55 Log In   Log Out    Allows you to assign the Log In mode or Log Out mode within a hunting  ring or UCD   Uniform Call Distribution  group  When in the Log Out mode  you can leave the group  temporarily  preventing hunting calls from being sent to your extension  The lightning patterns  of the Log In   Log Out button and status are as follows    Off   Log In mode   Red   Log Out mode   Flashing red moderately   Calls are waiting in the UCD queue    Log In   Log Out  Using the Log In   Log Out button     O  Log In Log Out     Lift the handset or press Press Log In Log Out Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR   flexible button   and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR        The Log In Log Out indicator light turns off in Log In mode or turns steady red  in Log Out mode        User Manual 207    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Log In   Log Out  Using the feature number   PT and SLT    oo EEn e  fy ig  e 9 lalsfo  To LOR  DUE J  G Wa    Lift the handset For Log In mode  Dial 451  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  or press For Log Out mode  Dial 450  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR   SP PHONE MONITOR            lt PT Display Example gt        Log in       or          Log o
115. Lift the handset or press For PT  Press CO assigned Dial tone Dial the phone number  Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR  as Loop CO     Group CO   Single CO   For any telephone  Dial the line access   code  9 or 81 through 88          Gba    Hang up or press    The selected CO indicator   The display shows the  SP PHONE MONITOR  light turns green  phone number        User Manual 95    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           96    Conditions   lt PT gt      There are four types of Line Preference for outgoing calls      Idle Line No Line Prime    Line Prime INTERCOM Line   Each preference can be selected by Station or System  Programming        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute the   Intercom Calling  feature to extensions by using the  Extension Dialing  display  feature     e Helpful hints for the Handsfree  speakerphone  operation are noted in the  Handsfree  Operation  feature     User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  4 3 51 Hands free Operation  PT only   4 3 52 Intercom Calling  4 3 64 Outward Dialing  Line Access     SUMMARY  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 2 2 Receiving Calls    Any Telephone     CO  INTERCOM  ON Eu  i    or    Lift the handset or Press a rapid flashing CO or INTERCOM   press SP PHONE MONITOR       The CO or INTERCOM indicator light  turns steady green   
116. Manual    User Programming          3 2 2  001  System Speed Dialing Number Set    Description    Used to program the System Speed Dialing numbers  These numbers are available for any  extension user in the system     Selection     Speed dial numbers  000 through 499     Telephone number  24 digits  max      Default  All speed dial numbers     Not Stored    User Manual 77    User Programming          Programming    Display PT    Lo JLo  L       Dial 001  Press NEXT      lt PT Display gt   lt PT Display gt                    O01 SYS SPD DI SPD Code           Enter a telephone number  Press STORE     e To delete the current entry  press CLEAR   e To change the current entry  press CLEAR  and enter the new number     Press END     Conditions    speed dial no     Enter a speed dial number   000 through 499      e To enter speed dial number 000   you can also press NEXT    lt PT Display Example gt      lt To continue  gt        NEXT    SELECT          000 Not Stored           When SELECT is pressed           Press NEXT or    PREV or SELECT        speed dial no     Enter the desired speed  dial number   000 through 499            Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits  The valid characters are 0 through  9    and   keys  and the FLASH or FLASH RCL  PAUSE  SECRET and     _  hyphen  buttons         To store the flash signal  press FLASH or FLASH RCL   Note  The Stored flash will only be effective during an established call         To store a hyphen  press the       button 
117. Name Set 0 0 0    ccc cecccessceeeeeeeeseeeseecseeceseeeeeseeeenseeeseeesees 80  3 2 4  003  Extension Number Set         ccccccccccscccssccesseceessceesecessceessecesseceeseeessseeessesesaeeeseees 83  332 5   004  Extension  N  m   Setis rsciseetesecesusoniceiccvisvis a lesetioadeedioatvsstinspitees aioe ebeeke  86  3 2 6 LOFT   DISA  User  COGS iranata iieii i E EE E dosnt tadeteatededl as euaesisees 89  4 Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT   4 1    Before  Operating cs sccsecicssceccdcccestcessvceseseseeseceusecesceeenvedsassvecseseusedseuacevaoeovesdonsesoseieeesaseeess 92  4 1 1 Before Operating ices ccrecssitecetetiresesteastesd oaccdvesd cedendi a E teva nicanbetoess 92  4 2 Basic Oper ations              csscccsscccscsssccssssecsssscsscsssccecescesssccecsseessecsssssescessseseesscsessesseseees 95  Ard  D  Making Cals ites avez ta oiss ceectocestsicbsea hse A 95  A 2 2  Receiving CallStreet bestia a e ave ais 97  4 3 Station Features and Operation         seessoossoesooesssssscsssesssesssesseossoesocossoossossoossoosssosssosssee 98  4 3 1 Absent Message Capability 00 0    cccccccecseceseceseeeseeeseeeseeessensecnseceseceseesseeessecsseeeeseenaes 98  4 3 2  Account  Code Entry  4 cic aise eh Ad Aaa eh aa Baits Seaton 101  4 3 3 Alternate Calling     Ring   Voice        ee cccecccesceeseceseeeseeeseeescecsaecsecnseecnseseeeseeeesaeeeaees 105    User Manual 9    Table of Contents          10    4 3 4   4 3 5   4 3 6   4 3 7   4 3 8   4 3 9   4 3 10  4 3 11  4 3 12  4
118. Note    1  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired itemis     displayed   2  Press the SELECT Button     3  Enter the parameter  if required     KX T7433  1  Press the FEAT  S3  button     2  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at  the arrow     3  Press the SEL  S3  button   4  Enter the parameter  if required   5  On hook  if required     KX T7436  1  Press the Features  F4  or FEAT  S3  button     2  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at  the arrow     3  Press the SEL  S3  button   4  Enter the parameter  if required   5  On hook  if required     System Feature List    When using a KX T7436  you can press the  Function button  F1 through F10  on the same  line of the desired item instead of the SEL  S3   button     When using a KX T7436  you can press the  Feature  F4  button in any display  initial  through third     Before rotating the Jog Dial  you can press the    corresponding alphabet key to select the  desired letter      lt Example gt  Press 2 twice to display  B  items     You can access the following features which are displayed in alphabetical order  The  parameters use in the list are for a telephone connected to a KX TD1232  For more details   about the features and the required parameters  refer to the respective features in 4 3 Station  Features and Operation  and 4 4 Operator   Manager Service Features                    Display Display Pare  Feature D t   KX T7436 KX 17235   KX 17431 KX T7433  ee ee ee  Absent MSG Off ABST MSG Off Cance
119. ONE     Confirmation tone  and dial tone    309    Station Features and Operat    ion  DPT SLT           Canceling    Press SHIFT  until    FEAT    is  displayed     Lo      Press FEAT      DSS     Ci          Dial the desired extension  number or press DSS on  which you have set   the Timed Reminder      lt PT Display Example gt           Alarm    Cancelled          Any Telephone    Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     Confirmation tone  and dial tone    310     z  x Lo      Dial 7X0     y  Gla  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR         gt R Timed Remind  Room Ready  MENU  co fo       Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL        R Timed Remind    is  at the arrow     y  Gba  Hang up or press the   SP PHONE     Confirmation tone  and dial tone     DSS     or  7 J    extension no     Dial the desired extension  number or pressDSS on  which you have set   the Timed Reminder      lt PT Display Example gt           Cancelled       Alarm       User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Checking the time setting    Display PT    C D 3  R Co To    Lift the handset or press Dial 7X2  Dial the desired extension Hang up or press  SP PHONE  number or press DSS on SP PHONE   which you have set  the Timed Reminder      lt PT Display Example gt   e If  10 10  has been set  the display shows  e If time setting is not stored           Alarm 10 10AM  only one time Alarm Not Stored                   or    10  10AM    daily                            Conditions     T
120. OR    zZ                  1  Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until  M appears   2  Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until  i appears   3  Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until  k appears   4  Press 2 and then rotate the Jog Dial until  e appears     Pressing the SHIFT button alternates between capital and lower case letters  Once this  button is pressed  that letter SHIFT mode remains until SHIFT is pressed again    To erase the last word  to backspace   press the CONF button     The CONF button becomes the   lt      backspace  key when using the overlay     To erase all of the data  press the CLR  S2  button    If you keep rotating the Jog Dial  all of the characters will be displayed in order    lt Example gt  If you rotate the Jog Dial after pressing 2  all of the characters will appear  in the following order   AaBb   Zz space              lt  gt     amp     AaBb       Conditions  e The default is  Not Stored         Up to 10 dialing numbers and names can be assigned  Each dialing number has a maximum  of 16 digits and each name has a maximum of 10 characters     User Manual    65    Station Programming       66 User Manual    User Programming       Section 3    User Programming    User Manual 67    User Programming          3 1 User Programming Instructions    3 1 1 General Programming Instructions    User Programming allows you  any extension user who knows the User Programming  Password  to program the following system features from your telephone individ
121. P PHONE MONITOR        Calling a doorphone    Any Telephone  hj    R Gio    yp    Lift the handset or press Dial 31  Enter a doorphone number Confirmation tone Talk   SP PHONE MONITOR   1 through 4 for KX TD816    1 through 8 for KX TD1232       lt PT Display Example gt              Doorphone x      doorphone number   1 through 8           176 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To unlock the door from an assigned extension    Any Telephone  hp    oy p s  E  ON Ee D cls    Enter a doorphone number    Lift the handset or press Dial 55   1 throu Confirmation Hang up or press  gh 4 for KX TD816    SP PHONE MONITOR  1 through 8 for KX TD1232   tone SP PHONE MONITOR     e The door is left unlocked for the preprogrammed  amount of time  default  5 s     lt PT Display Example gt              Door 1 Open          door opener number   1 through 8        To unlock the door while talking to the visitor at the doorphone from any extension    v  AN   Dial 5  Confirmation tone Hang up or press    SP PHONE MONITOR        The door is left unlocked for the preprogrammed  amount of time  default  5 s     lt PT Display Example gt     Door 1 Open  door opener number       y  IEN    Flash the Confirmation Confirmation  hookswitch  tone and tone  dial tone       The door is left unlocked for the preprogrammed  amount of time  default  5 s         Conditions  e An optional Doorphone Card and a doorphone are necessary for this feature     User Manual 177    Station Featu
122. PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        Ext Data Clear                   Conditions       With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 79 Station Speed Dialing    Allows you to store up to 10 speed dial numbers at your extension  These numbers are available  for your extension only     Storing the phone number    Any Telephone    f    l  Q j  e      3     0   station speed dial no    desired no                 Lift the handset Dial 30  Enter the station speed Enter the Dial    Confirmation Hang up or press  or press dial number  0 through 9   desired number  tone and dial SP PHONE MONITOR   SP PHONE MONITOR  tone       Dialing  Any Telephone       gt    3   station speed dial no           Lift the handset or press Dial 3X  Enter the station speed  SP PHONE MONITOR  dial number  0 through 9         Conditions  e You can store an extension number  a telephone number  or a feature number up to 16 digits   Valid digits are  0 through 9    X  and PAUSE button  For SLT users  PAUSE  pausing  time  can be stored by dialing x x      To store the telephone number of an outside party  the line access code  9 or 81 through 88   must be stored as the leading digit       Stati
123. Panasonic    Digital Super Hybrid System  User Manual    KX TD816  Mogel KX TD1 232                                                                Please read this manual before using Digital Super Hybrid System           Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Telephone System     User Manual    System Components                            System Components  Model No  Description   Service Unit KX TD816 Digital Super Hybrid System  Main Unit   KX TD1232  KX T7220 Digital Proprietary Telephone  KX T7230 Digital Proprietary Telephone with 2 line Display  KX T7235 Digital Proprietary Telephone with 6 line Display  KX T7250 Digital Proprietary Telephone   Telephone KX T7420 Digital Proprietary Telephone  KX T7425 Digital Proprietary Telephone  KX T7431 Digital Proprietary Telephone with 1 line Display  KX T7433 Digital Proprietary Telephone with 3 line Display  KX T7436 Digital Proprietary Telephone with 6 line Display  KX T7240 Digital DSS Console   Optional KX T7440 Digital DSS Console   Equipment KX T7441 Digital DSS Console with Answer and Release   buttons  User  lied  nal aed Single Line Telephones  Equipment                         For your future reference    SERIAL NO    found on the bottom of the unit        DATE OF PURCHASE       NAME OF DEALER       DEALER S ADDRESS                DEALER S TEL  NO              User Manual    Attention          Attention    When using the KX T7200 and KX T7400 series  keep the following conditions in  mind     If there is any trouble  
124. Pickup Deny         C Pickup Deny          PRSE APPL NON    Complete to set  Call Pickup Deny         C Parked at    MISE EN ATT A 1    Complete to set  Call Park         Callback Ext1234       RAPPEL PSTE 1234    Complete to set  Camp On            Callback COOl1          RAPPEL LRO1        Complete to set  Camp On         Callback TRG 1       RAPPEL GR LR 1    Complete to set  Camp On            Callback CO               RAPPEL LR         Complete to set  Camp On  when there is no  idle outside line        Call Waiting Off             APPEL EN ATT NON    Cancel  Call Waiting         Call Waiting 1             AVERT  ATT 1    Complete to set  Call Waiting 1            Call Waiting 2       AVERT  ATT 2    Complete to set  Call Waiting 2                  Call Waiting 3                   AVERT  ATT 3       Complete to set  Call Waiting 3         User Manual    369       APPENDIX                                        English Display French Display Description   CO 01 CO 01 Idle outside line is captured  Called by an  outside line    CO 01 0 01 15  LR 01 0 01 15 Duration time of incoming outside call    CO 01  amp  CO 02 LR 01  amp  LR 02 Conference with two outside lines   Called by hold recall       Conference   Unattended    CO 03  Free LR 3  LIBRE Called by  Camp On   Outside line recall         CO 02 AB COMPANY       LR 02 AB COMPANY    Received an outside call with a Caller ID  the  outside line number and the outside line name  are assigned           Conference CONFERENCE
125. Recording mode  the Two Way Record  Be PHONE exible buion   indicator turns on  Pressing the Two Way Record  button cancel the recording and the light turns off        Stopping the monitoring    FLASH RCL  LCS Cancel   r Ld       Press FLASH or FLASH RCL or LCS Cancel   flexible button         The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly        In the Private mode    When callers are connected to your voice mailbox  an alert tone is sent  The LCS indicator light  flashes green rapidly when a caller is connected to your voice mailbox   When using a single  line telephone  which is connected with a proprietary telephone in parallel  you hear ringing         Stopping the alert tone    FLASH RCL eh i     LCS Cancel     The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing        green rapidly  Press FLASH or FLASH RCL or e The alert tone stops   Live Call Screening Cancel button     or or       User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Monitoring the recording message    INTERCOM    Lift the handset or press Press the flashing Press INTERCOM   SP PHONE MONITOR  LCS  flexible button      e The LCS indicator light flashes green slowly    e To stop monitoring  lift the handset   The FLASH or FLASH RCL button or the LCS Cancel button can also be used to stop monitoring   The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly        Having a conversation with a party     LSC     Lift the handset Press the flashing  or press SP PHONE  LCS  flexibl
126. SP PHONE MONITOR        The held party and paged extension are connected  and can start a conversation        Using Paging     External  to a particular external pager    PT and SLT    During a conversation       TRANSFER  C  ForPT    yY For SLT  l             For PT  Press TRANSFER   For SLT  Flash the hookswitch     Dial tone       The other party is placed on  consultation hold      9  a    is     Announce  Wait for an answer        User Manual       external pager no        Dial external pager number   1 for KX TD816    1 through 4 for KX TD1232      Confirmation tone   optional     gy  Gla    Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR      optional     e The held party and paged extension are connected  and can start a conversation     241    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Using Paging     Group  to all paging groups    nal lave ee     During a conversation       TRANSFER  For PT    l For SLT  Pes      x  FA a  For PT  Press TRANSFER  Dial tone Dial 330  Confirmation  For SLT  Flash the hookswitch  tone  optional           e The other party is placed on  consultation hold       g  ca  a Eb    Announce  Wait for Confirmation Hang up or press  an answer  tone  optional  SP PHONE MONITOR       The held party and the paged extension are  connected and can start a conversation        Using Paging     Group  to a particular paging group  PT and SLT    During a conversation       TRANSFER  For PT    l For SLT J   3  8    paging group no   lea      A 
127. SS  S1   Confirmation tone Wait for an  answer and talk        User Manual 219    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Executing    Any Telephone    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call     Confirmation tone Wait for an  answer and talk        To talk to the third party    7235   7436    If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset  you  hear a confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT     Speak with the third  party through microphone     e The caller s number or name is shown on the display for  five seconds in 10 seconds intervals    lt PT Display Example gt        123  Tony                Caller s extension number  e You can talk to two parties individually        220 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands free mode    7235   7436    If OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call using the handset  you  hear a confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT        f GW as  ang up or press    SP PHONE  Speak with the third  party through microphone     e The current call is disconnected  e You can talk in hands free     The INTERCOM indicator light mode   turns green        To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold  7235   7436    If OHCA is activated by the other party when you a
128. T           4 4 8 System Working Report    The operator or manager can print or clear the system working report  For details about the  recorded contents  please consult with your dealer     7235   7436    Cc  Features    Press Features     Confirmation tone  and dial tone    Press MODE until   Feature Access  is  displayed     Confirmation tone  and dial tone    co    Press NEXT until the  following is displayed     y  N   Hang up or press  SP PHONE           Rotate Jog Dial until   SWR Print  is displayed     y  Gla  Hang up or press   SP PHONE        La  eLo    SWR Printout    1 0     Press SWR Printout  Dial 1 or 0       1  to print out the data        0  to clear the date     lt PT Display Example gt        SWR Data Dump     1  to print out             SWR Data Clear     0  to clear                 SWR Print 1 0    SELECT MODE  a  Co     a  Lo     Dial 1 or 0       1  to print out the data      0  to clear the data    Press SELECT      lt PT Display Example gt        SWR Data Dump     1  to print out             SWR Data Clear     0  to clear             User Manual    301    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            gt  SWR Print 1 0  Timed Reminder  MENU SEL        oa o       Press SHIFT until Press FEAT  Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL    FEAT  is displayed   SWR Printout   is  at the arrow     y  Ga  Dial 1 or 0         1  to print out the data Confirmation tone Hang up or press      0  to clear the data and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt  
129. T  Flash the hookswitch  tone and  dial tone            The current call is placed on hold          ga e  J  a    Ringback tone Wait for  an answer      CO   A  line access code             Press CO or enter  a line access code   9 or 81 through 88       9  d      Announce        phone no              Dial the phone  number where  calls will be  transferred     v  ola  Hang up or press  SP PHONE        MONITOR       The call is transferred     Conditions    Class of Service  Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature     Outside to outside call   If an outside call is transferred to an outside party   outside to outside call  is established  and the call duration is restricted by a system timer  Outside to Outside Line Call Duration  Time  1 64 min      Hold Recall tone   Hold Recall tone is generated to the extension who transferred the call 50 seconds before  the time out    Hold Alarm tone   Hold Alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out  The  call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension user  who transferred the call  joins  the outside to outside call to establish a conference call            lt PT gt     User Manual       Pressing the FLASH or FLASH RCL button while dialing clears the display  Then you  can enter the revised number     145    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Ifyou want to return to the held call  press the TRANSFER button or corresponding CO  
130. T SLT           Features on the Second Display       Call Forwarding      Busy   No Answer  Sets forwarding incoming calls    to another extension when busy  or you do not answer           Call Forwarding      to Outside Line    Sets forwarding all incoming    calls to an external party   Dial destination       extension number     ooo  ooo  oOo  fm  Dial line access code   9 or 81 through 88    On hook  Ooo  oo      oO  z fn  GD    Dial destination    phone number and       ooo  ooo    oo  o    314    MENU PREV NEXT  CE ea       Second Display    FWD BSY NA  FWD CO Line  FWD From   FWD From Cancel                                                                MENU PREV                                  Press the PREV  S2  or  NEXT  S3  button to  go to the first display           Call Forwarding      Follow Me  Sets or cancels  Call    Forwarding     All Calls  from  the destination extension              E       Dial your  extension number     On hook   g   E    Gw    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 3 Call Log  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235   KX     T7230 only     If you do not answer an incoming outside call  your extension automatically records the call   information from the Caller ID service   and the SHIFT button indicator lights  Up to 30 calls  can be logged per extension  When the call log is full  30 calls are stored   you can select how  the 31st call is treated  Either a new call can be disregarded or the new call ov
131. The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly   Recording starts after the confirmation tone     AUTO DIAL  STORE    Press STORE or wait until  playback is finished     Confirmation tone    Confirmation tone     2 AUTO DIAL  a E     STORE    Record a message  Press STORE or wait until a    maximum recording time  has elapsed        The recording is stopped and STORE  indicator light turns steady red    e The recorded message will be played  back automatically     lt PT Display Example gt              OGM 2 Play 28       y  ola  Hang up or press  SP PHONE        The STORE indicator light turns off     294       User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Recording a message    Any Telephone    2 Gel     Lift the handset or press Dial 361  Enter OGM number    SP PHONE MONITOR   1 through 4   Confirmation    tone     lt PT Display Example gt        OGM 2 Rec  00     __ Time counter   seconds   OGM number  selected    1 through 4                    The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly  Recording starts after the confirmation tone     h   2 AUTO DIAL ie  a   wy     STORE    Record a message  Press STORE or wait until Confirmation  a maximum recording time tone  has elapsed     e The recording is stopped and STORE indicator light turns steady red      The recorded message will be played back automatically      lt PT Display Example gt           OGM 2 Play 28          h      if  AUTO DIAL yer y  ian    De    Press STORE or wait until Confirmation Hang up 
132. Trunk Answer From Any Station  TAFAS  271  Two Way Record 29  Two Way Recording into Phantom mailbox 273  Two Way Recording into Voice Mail 272  Two Way Transfer 29    U    Uniform Call Distribution  UCD  274  User Programming Password 71    vV    Voice Mail  VM  Transfer 29   Voice Mail Integration 275   Voice Mail Transfer 278   Voice Mail Transfer to Phantom Mailbox 278  VOLUME 27   Volume Control 33  37   VPS Integration 211    W    Wake Up Call 265  Walking COS 280    386    Index       387    Panasonic Consumer Electronics  Company  Division of Matsushita  Electric Corporation of America  One Panasonic Way  Secaucus    New Jersey 07094  www panasonic com    Copyright     Panasonic Sales Company     PSC       Division of Matsushita Electric of  Puerto Rico  Inc    Ave  65 de Infanter  a  Km  9 5    San Gabriel Industrial Park  Carolina   Puerto Rico 00985    This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co   Ltd   KME   Under the applicable copyright  laws  this manual may not be reproduced in any form  in whole or part  without the prior written consent of    KME and its licensee        2001 Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co   Ltd  All Rights Reserved     Printed in the United Kingdom    PSQX2579YA KA0801HK1052    
133. a cession 326  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory         ccceccceccesseceseeeeeeseeeseeenseneeenseees 328  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu           c ccsceeseeeseeteeees 329  4 5 10 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features          ccccccecseeseeesteeteeeteees 338  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory                 341  4 5 12 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access  Menuka a od gece  a N a Mure Tt Maat o tage ton hort 346  5 DSS Console Features  Sel    COMM GUTATON Ss  scscccsceecesecaeccesc  scasevksscsesscenuascsaseesssedesassusceseoscsecasedesessusedebasedsadanscsedsones 352  Sh  Confisuration sc nsrecsrescgeascteysiasts e a E E E E a EE 352  5 1 2 Location of Controls    ee E E E aT 353  5 13  Feature BUNS ienee deci a A E E A eae Aaa 355  5 2  Station PrograMMiING     cccscscecensesscsosovsccereascchdsesnesovessvecdseceseveaccedsssonsvevsdeceensacennesbeses 356  5 2 1 Station Programming Instructions            cccecscesseessecseceeseceeceeeeeeseceseeeseenseceeeeeeneeeaes 356  5 2 2 Extension Number Assignment             cccccscccssessecscsesseceseceeceeeeeesecsaecsaecnaecnseeneeeeneeaes 358  5 2 3 One Touch Dialing Assignment            cccccccccsesseesseeseceeceeeeeneeeseesaeeeseesseceseeneeenseeaes 359  5 2 4 One Touch Access Assignment for System Features           cccccccesscsteeeteceteeeseeeteeenes 360  5 3 DSS Console Features            sccsccs
134. ager only     Refer to the  corresponding feature  in Section 4 4    Operator   Manager  Service Features            User Manual    0OO0 0    UO000          Timed Reminder    Sets or cancels the  alarm ringing time        Press the desired Function button  and enter the required parameters           Co  Time  hh mm   7 00 co  AM PM 0 1   0 Co  Daily Y N 1 0   0 Co     MENU    J  J J  Parameters    Time   hh mm      hour  01 through 12   minute  00 through 59     AM PM  0  for AM    1  for PM     Daily alarm  1  for Yes    0  for No     To set  press PROG  S3  button   To cancel  press CLR  S2  button     Time  hh mm   7 00  AM PM 0 1   0    Daily Y N 1 0   0    00000    MENU CLR             MENU PREV NEXT                            Eighth Display    Station Program Clear   1 0              SWR Printout  Timed Reminder  Walking COS     codet text                                MENU PREV NEXT             Returns to the    Walking COS    Calls using your  privileges at another  extenison     first display           Enter password     Dial your extension  number     Dial the line access code   if required  and  phone number     337    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 10 KX T7431   KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features    The KX T7431  KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephones allow you to make a call or operate the  features using the display message     1  Call Directory  Extension Dialing  Station Speed Dialing  System Speed Dialing    2  System Feature Access Menu  
135. al tone SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        Call Waiting Off                   User Manual 147    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To talk to the new party by terminating the current call    While hearing a Call Waiting tone  While hearing a Call Waiting tone      CO  INTERCOM  2 g Q E   CJ or W  ae ows ts A    Press the flashing CO Talk to the Hang up  Lift the handset  Talk to the  or INTERCOM  new caller  new caller        The current call is disconnected     The current call is disconnected        To talk to the new party by holding the current call    While hearing the Call Waiting tone and the CO or INTERCOM indicator is flashing rapidly     HOLD  CO  INTERCOM l K   or    Press HOLD  Press the flashing Talk to the  CO or INTERCOM  new caller        The current call is placed on hold   e If both the current call and new call are extension calls   you will be connected to the new caller simply by pressing HOLD     While hearing a Call Waiting tone     Mp fp     i qe y oy K   vY 7 o J  amp     amp  2    Flash the Confirmation tone Dial 50  Dial tone Hang up  Lift the Talk to the  hookswitch  and dial tone handset  new caller        The current call is placed on hold        Conditions     BSS  OHCA   Whisper OHCA  If an extension user dials  1  while hearing a busy tone  BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA  may be activated at the called extension   This is determined by the following conditions     148 User Manual    Station Features and Operatio
136. ame the extension numbers     User Manual References  4 3 52 Intercom Calling  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    User Manual    85    User Programming          3 2 5  004  Extension Name Set    Description  Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program  003  Extension Number  Set     Selection    e Jack number   KX TD816     01 through 16   1    2   KX TD1232     01 through 64   1    2     1   first part   2   second part    e Name  10 characters  max      Default  All extension ports     Not Stored    86 User Manual    User Programming          Programming    Display PT    mo oo    Dial 004  Press NEXT  Enter a jack number      lt PT Display gt   lt PT Display gt  e To enter jack number 01  you can  also press NEXT     004 EXT NAME SE Jack NO     gt  e To select the second part   2   press  NEXT after entering the jack number      lt PT Display Example gt                                                01 1 Not Stored          Repeat these steps   lt To continue  gt   When SELECT is pressed           NEXT ii    Enter a name  Press STORE  Enter the desired  extension number     SELECT          e To delete the current entry  press CLEAR   e To change the current entry  press CLEAR  and enter the new name     Press NEXT or  PREV or SELECT     Press END        Conditions    e There is a maximum of 32 names for KX TD 816 and 128 names for KX TD1232   Each name has a maximum of 
137. amming  Provides the steps required to assign some features to the system    Section 4  Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT   Provides background information on the DPT SLT features and lists the steps required to  activate each feature    Section 5  DSS Console Features  Provides configuration information on the DSS Console  It gives background information on  the DSS Console features and lists the steps required to activate each feature    Section 6  Appendix  Provides Display Examples  a Feature Number List  Tone List  and other information are  explained in this section    Section 7  Index  Provides the important words and phrases to help you access the required information easily     Features and Capabilities    KX TD816 and KX TD1232 systems are sophisticated and powerful systems that satisfy just  what you expect of an office communications system  Some of the remarkable features are  listed below     Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On  informs you when the selected outside line or the  called party becomes idle     6 User Manual    Introduction          Call Log  Incoming      Option  allows you to confirm the incoming outside call information  on the display  You can also call back the caller by selecting one of the memorized numbers   This feature is available only for the KX T7230  KX T7235  KX T7433 and KX T7436     Call Log  Outgoing redials by selecting one of the last five outside calls you made  according  to the number information on the display  This featu
138. an assign a  Flexible  CO  DSS  button as Another Extension Message Waiting button or the Phantom  Message Waiting button by program   005  Flexible CO Button Assignment   For details   consult your dealer or manager     Setting  nal irae em     S  ON  7  o   4   or   phantom extension no     Lift the handset or press Dial 701  Dial the extension number or the phantom extension  SP PHONE MONITOR  number where you left a message notification           y  ola  Confirmation Hang up or press    tone and SP PHONE MONITOR   dial tone    If the called extension or phantom extension is busy or does not answer     l    MESSAGE di g v  oO  gl d    Press MESSAGE  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR        User Manual 209    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling    wal lace ee           S  ON  o   o  extension no  or   Phantom extension no     Lift the handset or press Dial 700  Dial the extension number or the phantom extension  SP PHONE MONITOR  number where you left a message notification     hy    ne s  wy  Gba    Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and dial tone  SP PHONE MONITOR                 Checking and Selecting a message notification by the receiver    Display PT    If there is any message notification  the message waiting lamp  another extension  message waiting lamp or phantom extension message waiting lamp  MESSAGE  indicator  light will be on  When the telephone is idle and on hook     MESSAGE MESSAGE MESSAGE  or or    
139. an incoming call destination for a outside line  you  cannot receive any incoming outside calls unless a G CO  L CO or S CO button associated  with the outside line is assigned     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 64 Outward Dialing  Line Access     SUMMARY    Loop CO  L CO  button  All outside lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone  The  assigned button serves as an L CO button  An incoming call on any outside line arrives at the  L CO button  unless there are S CO or G CO buttons associated with the line or unless the  button is already in use  To make a outside call  you simply press the dedicated L CO button   Pressing the L CO button provides the same operation as dialing an automatic line access code     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 64 Outward Dialing  Line Access     SUMMARY    User Manual 31    DPT Overview          1 1 5 Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series    The Jog Dial can be used for the display contrast and the volume control  Rotate the Jog Dial  in either direction as desired  The contrast or the volume level will change as follows     Left AA N Right   counter clockwise   clockwise     Level decreases Level increases    Display Contrast Adjustment    The MODE button and the Jog Dial for KX T7431 users  and a Soft button and the Jog Dial  for KX T7433 and KX T7436 users are used to adjust the display contrast  The contrast level  is indicated on the display by the n
140. and dial    SP PHONE MONITOR   tone                   You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared    2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or  canceled      lt PT Display Example gt           Alarm 01 00AM     only one time Alarm 01 00AM                          User Manual 307    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling    7235   7436       Ca  Remote Timed Reminder       Cc  Features    Press Features  Rotate Jog Dial or press Press Remote Timed Reminder   NEXT until the following  is displayed      lt PT Display Example gt           Extension                 DSS  We est    Dial the desired extension Press NEXT  S3   Press CLR  S2   Confirmation tone  number or press DSS on  which you have set  the Timed Reminder    lt PT Display Example gt   y Extension   1234   GWs Time  hh mm   07 00   AM PM 0 1   0    Hang up or press the Daily Y N 1 0  0  SP PHONE              308 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling    Press MODE until     Feature Access     is displayed     Lo      extension no     Rotate Jog Dial until     R Timed Remind    is  displayed      DSS     or  TJ    Dial the desired extension  number or press DSS on  which you have set   the Timed Reminder      lt PT Display Example gt        Alarm          Cancelled       User Manual           gt R Timed Remind    SELECT MODE  ceo co    Press SELECT     v  Gba  Hang up or press the   SP PH
141. at  f s  e Q  7  4  o  To eer Gh    Lift the handset or press To set  Dial 741  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  To cancel  Dial 740  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR              Dialing  Any Telephone    Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        Conditions      This feature does not work if you go off hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call  on hold    e Up to 16 digits  consisting of  0 through 9  and  x   can be stored      cannot be stored    e Valid digits are  0 through 9    x  and PAUSE button  For SLT users  PAUSE  pausing  time  can be stored by dialing x x       During the waiting time after going off hook  you can dial another party and override this  feature  This waiting time  between going off hook and connecting with the called line  can  be changed by System Programming   Default  1 s       With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     250 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   204  Pickup Dial Waiting Time    User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 251    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 72 Privacy Release  PT only     Allows you to establish a three party c
142. ation Programming mode  the display shows the following message  as the initial programming mode        PT PGM Mode          We recommend a PT with display for Station Programming to avoid mis operation    The display also gives you helpful or stored data information related to your programming  steps  In this section  we note the display example in the programming steps  if required  You  can also refer to the  Display Examples  in the Appendix  Section 6      Entering Station Programming mode    Be sure that the telephone is idle and on hook     2s we    Press PROGRAM  Dial 99       The STORE indicator lights   e If 99 is not dialed within 5 seconds after the PROGRAM button is  pressed  the Station Programming mode is canceled      lt PT Display Example gt   PT PGM Mode    Initial programming display                e If there is no entry within one minute  the Station Programming mode  is canceled and normal call handling mode resumes automatically        User Manual    Station Programming          Exiting Station Programming mode    When the display shows the initial programming mode     PROGRAM ran    or  gt       Press PROGRAM or lift the handset     e To exit the Station Programming mode  press PROGRAM  You are in  the call handling mode        User Manual 45    Station Programming          Confirming the assigned function data      Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9         program access number       Enter the program access n
143. ature  you can select the display in English or French     The left part is the English display and the right part is the French display           English Display French Display Description  Set Time  amp  Date REGLER Factory setting   HEUR DATE        Shown on the manager   s display only        FRI JANO1 12 00A       VEN JANO1 12 00A    The current date and time are not set         Pressing  X  while on hook alternates  between this display and the self extension  number and name display        1233    123     Make or receive an intercom call  name is not  assigned           123 Tony Viola       123  TONY VIOLA       Make or receive an intercom call  name is  assigned     Confirm key programming on the DSS or  MESSAGE button        234  Busy    234  OCCUPE    Destination extension is busy           456  DND 456  NPD Destination extension is set to  Do Not  Disturb  DND     567  Free 567  LIBRE Called by  Camp On   intercom recall            345 MDM Access    345  ACCES MDM    Destination is modem for remote access           1234567890 1234567890 Called by an outside line with the Caller ID    number   Panasonic PANASONIC Called by an outside line  with the Caller ID      number        950 1001PP12345 amp        950 1001PP12345 amp     Confirm key programming on the REDIAL   SAVE  or One Touch Dialing button           123 Tony Viola       123 TONY VIOLA    Make or receive an intercom call after the call  is transferred  name is assigned                             CO 02     
144. ayed     Programming Guide References  e  991  COS Additional Information    Features Guide References  e Call Monitoring in Station Hunting    User Manual 325    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 7 KX T7235 Display Features    The KX T7235 telephone allows you to make a call or operate the features using the display  message with the Function buttons     1  Call Directory    Extension Dialing  Station Speed Dialing  System Speed Dialing    2  System Feature Access Menu    The System Feature Access Menu provides a display of the system features which appear in  alphabetical order  The available features are as follows        Absent Message Capability Message Waiting   Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On   Cancel   Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service  Background Music  BGM      External Outgoing Message  OGM    Call Log  Incoming Paging     External   Call Log Lock  Incoming Paging     Group   Call Park Paging     ANSWER   Call Pickup  Directed Paging     DENY   Call Pickup  Group Paralleled Telephone Connection  Call Pickup  Outside Line Pickup Dialing  Hot Line    Call Pickup Deny Station Program Clear   Call Waiting System Working Report   Data Line Security Timed Reminder   Door Opener Timed Reminder  Remote  Wake Up Call   Doorphone Call Walking COS   Electronic Station Lockout   Executive Busy Override Deny   External Modem Control   Hotel Application     Room Status  from a   guest room    Live Call Screening  LCS   Password Set   Log In   Log Out      
145. bination Table 2                                                                                  64    Rotating   Jog Dial    Pulses  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8   keys  1 1 Q q R r S s T t  2 2 A a B b C c D d  3 3 D d E e F f G g  4 4 G g H h I i J j  5 5 J j K k L l M m  6 6 M m N n O o P p  7 7 P p Q q R r S s  8 8 T t U u V v W w  9 9 W w X x Y y Z Z  0 0     A i    x x          lt   gt                amp        A a   lt Example gt         Using the SELECT button   See Combination Table 1     1  Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter  M     2  Press 4 and then press the SELECT button six times to enter  i    3  Press 5 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter  k    4  Press 3 and then press the SELECT button four times to enter  e          Using the SHIFT button and a Soft button   See Combination Table 1     1  Press 6 and then press the S1 button to enter  M     2  Press 4 and then press the SHIFT and S3 button to enter  i    3  Press 5 and then press the S2 button to enter  k     4  Press 3 and then press the S2 button to enter  e          Using the Jog Dial  With a KX T7431   KX T7433   KX T7436 only   See Combination Table 2   1  Press 6 and then rotate the Jog Dial one one pulse to enter  M    2  Press 4 and then rotate the Jog Dial six one pulse to enter  i    3  Press 5 and then rotate the Jog Dial four one pulse to enter  k      4  Press 3 and then rotate the Jog Dial four one pulse to enter  e      User Manual    Station Programming          
146. ces  such as computers and  facsimiles  operate uninterrupted     Setting   Canceling  Any Telephone     lt    rls olii ow    Lift the handset or press To set  Dial 7301  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  To cancel  Dial 7300  and dial tone       5  lt PT Display Example gt   6wa e When setting        Hang up or press Data Mode On    SP PHONE MONITOR        When canceling     Data Mode Off                  Conditions    e Automatic Privacy  Assigning Data Line Security always offers conversation privacy unless Privacy Release is    executed       If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security  it applies to the both  extensions     lt PT gt     e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Features Guide References  Hold Recall    User Manual References  4 3 27 Call Waiting  4 3 43 Executive Busy Override     Outside Line  PT only   4 3 42 Executive Busy Override     Extension  4 3 72 Privacy Release  PT only     User Manual 165    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    166 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 36    Direct Inward System Access  DISA      Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the  system  A DISA outgoing message is used to give out
147. conversation   AUTO DIAL STORE Button  Used for System Speed Dialing or storing program changes   CONF  Conference  Button  Used to establish a three party conference   FLASH Button   FLASH RCL Button  Sends an External Feature Access signal to the central office or host PBX to access their system  features  If a PBX is not being used  this button can be used to disconnect the current call and  start another call without hanging up   Function  F1 through F10  Buttons  Used to perform the corresponding displayed function or operation   FWD DND  Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb  Button  Used to program the Call Forwarding feature or set the Do Not Disturb  DND  feature   HOLD Button  Used to place a call on hold   INTERCOM Button  Used to make or receive extension calls   Jog Dial  Used to adjust the volume of the handset receiver  headset  ringer and speaker  It also adjusts  the display contrast  Refer to  Initial Setting for KX T7400 Series  in this section   For KX T7431  KX T7433 and KX T7436 users  it is also used to select data from the Call  Directory and the System Feature Access Menu   MESSAGE Button  Used to leave a notification to a busy extension or call back the message notification sender   MODE Button  Used to shift the display in order to access various features   MONITOR Button  Used for a hands free dialing operation   PAUSE Button  Inserts a pause in speed dial numbers or in One Touch dial numbers   PROGRAM Button  Used to enter and exit the Programming mode  
148. cseecssenseeeeaeeneeenneeaes 124  Call Forwarding     CANCEL          ccccsccssccssssescsecessecosececcssesesacssncesstentsceasseneesacenes 126  Cal ON sos oc  ets ta sSeo se a eg sedad a A cates sates 128  Call Hold  Exclusive  PT only          ccccccccsccssecsecseceseeeeecesecseeecsaecaaeesaeenseeneeenneennes 130  Call Hold Rete ve ries eneen ren eia ides oedet a a taste atea Neate E E 132  Call Park arenas nen a a A N E A N RA 134  Call Pickup  Directed ess cssecesieeterceesiceseceverceteiasanietetabessendbetrarseedensteaa as 136  Call Picktips  Group sc an desk ves tends a heteceastecad anther aaeiden ovacstetagnda ces 137  Call Pickup  Outside  Lime sez 2 038 socvetiincchshen a a a alates 138  Call Pickup Deny  sesccissi cox ccccetecoreete cee ieenep in iat yates couse ool head a E Taia 139  Call Splitting  ci  arsi E ee TEA EE T T entig enticement 140  Call Transfer     to Extenso  senini a a e D e 142  Call Transfer     to Outside Line          ccccccececceseceseceeseeeeeesceeeeesecsaecnseseeeenseeneessees 145  Call Waiting Srs rarena oara o VE EE Dh alteek Atel EE E E 147  Call Waiting from Central Office 00    ccc cccecceceseceseceseceseeeseeseeecseecsaenseeneaeenseenaeeaes 150  Calling Line Identification Presentation  CLIP           sssesesseeesesssssssesesssssesesrssesseses 152  Calling Line Identification Restriction  CLIR           ccesesccesseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeaes 154  Camp On Transfer to Phantom Extension          ccccccssecssessecesseeteceseceeeseeeesee
149. d        Switching from hands free to the handset mode          BN    Lift the handset        Conditions     The hands free mode is canceled if you do not start dialing within 10 seconds        The KX T7250 have a MONITOR button instead of a SP PHONE button  It can be used  for hands free dialing  etc   but not for a hands free conversation     e You can enable hands free mode by pressing a CO or INTERCOM button without going  off hook     e When  Full One Touch Dialing  is enabled  pressing a One Touch Dialing  DSS  Phantom   REDIAL or SAVE button provides the hands free mode     User Manual 195    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Helpful hints  e Use this unit in a quiet room for best performance      Ifthe other party has difficulty hearing you  decrease the volume        Ifyou and the other party speak at the same time  parts of your conversation will be lost  To  avoid this  speak alternately     User Manual References  4 3 48 Full One Touch Dialing  PT only     196 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 52 Intercom Calling    You can make a call to another extension user within the system or a tenant     Using the handset    Any Telephone    2    Lift the handset  Dial the extension number        Using the Speakerphone    SP PHONE INTERCOM R E  SP PHONE    Press SP PHONE Dial the extension number  Talk  Press SP PHONE   or INTERCOM        Using a DSS  Direct Station Selection  button     DSS     UA    Lift the handset or pr
150. d    Single CO          Group CO       Loop CO       DSS  Direct Station Selection        Phantom Extension       ONE TOUCH  One Touch Dialing        MESSAGE  Message Waiting        MESSAGE  Another Phantom Extension        FWD DND  Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb        SAVE  Saved Number Redial        ACCOUNT  Account Code Entry        CONF  Conference        KISIASA ISI IA ISSIS    QV NSN YNYES    Voice Mail  VM  Transfer       Log In   Log Out       Two Way Record        Two Way Transfer        LCS  Live Call Screening         LCS  Live Call Screening  Cancel        LIL EQIQEXL ER SISS SIRS RIRS SIRASI AISAS    QS I NS NS YN US    Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service                      User Manual 29    DPT Overview          is Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary  Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital  proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100       WY  indicates that the feature is available     Line Access Buttons  The following three types of CO buttons can be used to seize a outside line when making a call      Single CO  S CO  button  e Group CO  G CO  button  e Loop CO  L CO  button    Conditions       A flexible CO button can be assigned as a Line Access Button  S CO  G CO or L CO  in  either System Station Programming  Once a flexible CO button is assigned as a Line Access  Button  it provides the line status condition by lighting patterns and green red indication   P
151. d so on  The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from Jack to jack as required     Example  NEXT NEXT NEXT    01 1     01 2 P  02 1     02 2        PREV PREV PREV   Note    The first part ofa jack is for a DPT ofa XDP assigned jack  The second part is for a single line  device  Program  600  EXtra Device Port assigns which jacks are XDP     Entering Characters  You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers  extension numbers  etc   by  using the dialing key pad and buttons   Each of the twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad represents seven characters  Refer to  2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433   KX T7436 only      Storing your data  Press STORE to store your data   e The STORE indicator lights red and a confirmation tone sounds       Confirmation tone  one beep   After pressing STORE  you will hear a beep  This informs you that storage has been  completed successfully       Alarm tone  three beeps   If you hear this alarm  your entry is not valid     72 User Manual    User Programming          Making another selection within the same program address     To go to the next selection  press NEXT      To go to the previous selection  press PREV       To make a specific selection  press SELECT and then enter the number     Accessing another program address  After pressing STORE  you can access another program by one of the following two methods   a  To go to the next program address     e Larger program ad
152. de  For SLT    FA      For PT  Press TRANSFER  Dial tone Enter the desired  For SLT  Flash the hookswitch  service code       TRANSFER  Co              e The current call is placed on hold        188 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions     Flash Time    The flash time must be assigned as required by the Centrex  host PBX or outside line    lt PT gt     e Memory Dialing  During outside calls  a FLASH stored in System Speed Dialing  Station Speed Dialing    or One Touch Dialing works as External Feature Access  not as Flash  Disconnect  Signal       lt SLT gt        This feature does not function  if an SLT has a call on Consultation Hold     Programming Guide References   413  Flash Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 47 Flash  PT only     User Manual 189    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 46 External Modem Control  PT only     Allows you to control the external modem  connected to the system with a RS 232C cable  by  sending a pre assigned AT Command  for enabling Automatic Answer  etc       Activating an AT Command to RS 232C       Gg   gt    9    1     AT Command no     Lift the handset or press Dial 791  Enter the AT Command Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  number  1 through 5  SP PHONE MONITOR    1  for Command 1   2  for Command 2   3  for Command 3   4  for Command 4   5  for Command 5        lt PT Display Example gt   MODEM Command X                  
153. de line 03 is connected to extension jack number 09   Outside line 04 is connected to extension jack number 10   Outside line 09 is connected to extension jack number 17   Outside line 10 is connected to extension jack number 18   e All other conversations are disconnected during a power failure     e Digital proprietary telephones  DPTs  cannot be used during a power failure  SLTs can  work in the event of a power failure    e When power is restored after a power failure  your system automatically restarts  operation  maintaining as much of the previous system data as possible              Problem Probable Cause Possible Solution  Nothing is heard in the hands   The  Headset  mode is When the headset is not used  set  free mode  selected  the mode to  Handset      Refer to  Handset Headset  Selection  in Station  Programming  Section 2   or   Initial Setting   Section 1                  User Manual 381    APPENDIX             Problem    Probable Cause    Possible Solution       The unit does not ring        The outside number is not  programmed        The Ringer Volume is set  to  OFF         For programming outside  numbers  refer to the  Installation Manual     e Increase the Ringer Volume   Refer to  Initial Setting    Section 1         The display flashes the  following message        Set Time  amp  Date          THU JANO1 12 00A                The system internal clock  does not work properly     Consult with an authorized  Panasonic Factory Service  Center           38
154. ding         The DSS button indicator lights red steady while Live Call Screening is active     204 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           During Keep Recording mode  if you want to stop recording the conversation  press the  Two Way Recording button     An incoming call via a voice mail service can be monitored by the LCS feature while the  caller is leaving a message in your mailbox even when you have not set a Voice Mail  extension as the Call Forwarding destination    Call Waiting   If the extension user is busy on a call when a caller begins to leave a message  a call waiting  tone is sent  if programmed beforehand   The extension user can put the current call on hold  before accessing LCS    LCS button LCS Cancel button   A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as an LCS LCS Cancel button    LCS Password Clear   To prevent unauthorized monitoring  a 3 digit password must be set by the extension user   If the user forgets their password  it can be cleared by the Manager extension or an Operator     Programming Guide References     610  Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment    User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 4 5 Live Call Screening Password Control  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual    205    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 54 Lockout    
155. ditions    e Turning on off  You can turn on off the BGM only when your PT is not in use     Programming Guide References   803  Music Source Use   990  System Additional Information    User Manual 111    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 7 Busy Station Signaling  BSS     You can prompt a busy extension  ringing or during a call  to answer your call  The other  extension hears three beeps and knows that you are waiting     7230   7235   7433  7436    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call         BSS   N    Press BSS  S1   Wait for an  answer and talk     PT and SLT    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call     EN co     Wait for an  answer and talk        Conditions      BSS  OHCA   Whisper OHCA  If an extension user dials  1  while hearing a busy tone  BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA  may be activated at the called extension   This is determined by the following conditions                    Calling extension Called extension  Call Waiting setting  COS OHCA    OFF ON  assignment  0 1 2 3  Disable     BSS BSS BSS       OHCA       W OHCA           Enable BOD BSS OHCA     BSS                         112 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              OHCA  Off Hook Call Announcement   is activated when the called extension is KX T7235 or KX T7436    2  Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PT     To answer the signal from the calling extension  see
156. dix    If you use a dial pulse  DP  type single line telephone  SLT     It is not possible to access features that have  X  or     in their feature numbers     Tones   Various tone types  such as Confirmation tone  Dial tone  Call Waiting tone  etc  are explained  in the Appendix    Display   The display examples are in each operation step  if required  The display information list is in  the Appendix for your convenience     Programming Guide References   The related and required programming titles are noted for your reference in the Programming  Guide  System Programming should be done by the extension which connected to Jack number  01 or the System Manager  A KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436  KX T7230 and KX T7235  can be used for this programming  Station Programming is individual programming at your  own proprietary telephone  PT   You can customize the extension to your needs using any type  of proprietary telephone     Features Guide References   The related feature titles are noted for your reference in the Features Guide   User Manual References   The related feature titles are noted for your reference in this manual     Warning    Warning to the customer regarding the system password     a  Please maintain the secrecy of the password  Because a person who knows the password  can easily take over the control of any PBX system in the market and he may proceed to  commit toll fraud     b  Please select the dealer whom you can trust for the installation and maintenance   c
157. dress   lt KX T7200 series gt   Press Soft 1  SKP   or VOLUME V DOWN     lt KX T7400 series gt   Rotate the Jog Dial counterclockwise       Smaller program address   lt KX T7200 series gt   Press SHIFT   Soft 1  SKP   or VOLUMEA UP     lt KX T7400 series gt   Rotate the Jog Dial clockwise    b  To go to a specific program address   Press END  then enter the program address     Returning to the operation mode  1  Lift the handset while in programming mode     2  When the Initial Message  USR PGM NO      is displayed  press the PROGRAM button    To display the Initial Message  press END      User Manual 73    User Programming          3 2 User Programming    3 2 1  000  Date and Time Set    Notice    It is assumed that you have read Section 3 1  User Programming Instructions   Soft button  usage is explained in that section  therefore no references will be made to them in the following  instructions  The soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys at any time     Description  Sets the current date and time     Selection  e Year  00 through 99     Month  Jan  through Dec   e Day  1 through 31  e Day of the week  SUN   MON   TUE   WED   THU   FRI   SAT  e Hour  01 through 12  e Minute  00 through 59     AM PM     Hour format  12 or 24    Default    93 Jan  1 FRI 12 00 AM 12    74 User Manual    User Programming          Programming  Display PT     lt Date Setting gt      o    o o  G  year    Dial 000  Press NEXT  Enter the year   last 2 digits                   lt PT Di
158. ds free Answerback  PT only     You can answer an intercom call without lifting the handset     Setting    When the SP PHONE and the AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator are off     AUTO ANSWER    MUTE  Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE        The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator turns on        Canceling    When the AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator is on     AUTO ANSWER    MUTE  Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE        The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator turns off        Conditions    e Ring Voice Intercom Alerting Mode Override  This feature overrides the  Alternate Calling     Ring Voice  feature  A hands free  conversation mode is established as soon as a confirmation tone is sent        This feature does not work for the following calls       Outside calls      Doorphone calls    e When an outside call is transferred to your extension  this feature is overridden and a  ringing tone is heard     e This feature is not available for KX T7250     User Manual References  4 3 3 Alternate Calling     Ring   Voice    194 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 51 Hands free Operation  PT only     You can answer an intercom call without lifting the handset     Setting    SP PHONE    Press SP PHONE        The microphone and speaker are now activated and the  hands free operation is available        Switching from the handset to hands free mode    g  Gla    Press SP PHONE  Hang up     SP PHONE       Do not replace the handset without pressing the SP PHONE button  first  or the line will be disconnecte
159. dset or press Dial 42  Dial external pager Confirmation tone Talk          number  1 for KX TD816   tional  SPRPHONE MONITOR 1 through 4 for KX TD1232    OPtional        Conditions  e Only extensions within the paged group can answer  Paging     Group      e A confirmation tone is audible when the page is answered  Eliminating the tone is  programmable by System Programming      lt PT gt      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation    lt ISDN Telephone gt      The ISDN telephone users can only answer a page sent to an external pager     Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    238 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 67 Paging     Deny  PT only     Allows you to deny receiving paging announcement through the built in speakers of your  telephone     Setting    ly     G pS   R GPE          Lift the handset or press Dial 7211  Confirmation tone Hang up or press    SP PHONE MONITOR  SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        Paging Deny On                Canceling    hy       ip D   P GEE   Bs    Lift the handset or press Dial 7210  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt           Paging Deny Off             Condi
160. e button         The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing green slowly   e In Keep Recording mode  the Two Way Record indicator lights        During a conversation with another party   When the extension user is having a conversation  a call waiting tone is sent  The LCS indicator    light flashes green rapidly       If you want to terminate the current call    Monitoring    Gba  Hang up or press Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  SP PHONE MONITOR     e An alarm tone is sent  e Monitoring Starts        User Manual 203    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Having a conversation with a party     LCS     Lift the handset Press the flashing  or press SP PHONE  LCS  flexible button           If you want to hold the current call  Monitoring    HOLD    C  aba  Press HOLD  Hang up or press Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  SP PHONE MONITOR     e An alarm tone is sent  e Monitoring Starts        Having a conversation with the party     LCS     Press the flashing LCS Lift the handset   flexible button   or press SP PHONE        Conditions       The LCS indicator shows the feature status as follows    Red  steady    The Live Call Screening mode is on    Off   The Live Call Screening mode is off    Flashing green slowly   Live Call Screening is acting        Flashing green rapidly   Alarm tone is ringing in the Private mode       The Two Way Record indicator shows the feature status as follows    On   Recording the conversation   Off   Not recor
161. eminder  4 3 87 Uniform Call Distribution  UCD     User Manual 299    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 4 7 Remote Station Lock Control    The Manager and the Operators can remotely lock or unlock any extension  To lock an  extension  you can select to lock outside calls or intercom calls     Programming    PROGRAM        om x    Press PROGRAM  Dial 99  Dial 01  Dial the extension number or X         extension number to clear one extension      x    to clear all extensions    e You enter into the Station  Programming mode    lt PT Display Example gt  EXT No     5     lt PT Display Example gt                       PT PGM Mode    AUTO DIAL PROGRAM  a         STORE             Dial 1 or 2 or 3       1   to unlock      2   to lock outside calls      3   to lock intercom calls   except operator calls     Press STORE  Press PROGRAM or lift the handset  to exit the Station Programming mode      lt PT Display Example gt  e The STORE indicator lights        1234 CO Lock             Conditions       This feature supersedes the  Electronic Station Lockout  feature  If  Electronic Station  Lockout  has already been set by the extension user and this feature is set  the extension  user cannot cancel the lock  Only the Manager and the Operators can cancel the lock     e  Operator Call  is always available from any extension whether it is locked or not     User Manual References  4 3 40 Electronic Station Lockout    300 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SL
162. en     Programming Guide References   509  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     User Manual References  4 3 7 Busy Station Signaling  BSS   4 3 27 Call Waiting  4 3 60 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     Whisper  PT only     222 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 60 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     Whisper  PT only     This is a version of the OHCA feature  The difference is  OHCA provides two way  communication between two extensions but this feature provides one way communication   When this feature is activated  the called party can hear caller s voice through the handset but  the caller cannot hear the called party s voice    By default  this feature is available only when both calling and called extensions are using KX   T7400 series PTs     Setting    fe 5  6Wa     amp  ists     Lift the handset or press Dial 7313  Confirmation tone Hang up or press    SP PHONE  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   Call Waiting 3                   Canceling    h     PD     ro TBO   D  LEN Ea  Lift the handset or press Dial 7310  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   Call Waiting Off                   Executing  7433   7436    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call     h     ma  BSS v J   Eo BA BF    Press BSS  S1   Confirmation tone Wait for an  answer and talk        User Manual 223    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              224    Executin
163. ensecnseeneeeeneeeaes 192  Handset Microphone Mute  PT only        nsoeennseeneeeossoeeeeseeseesesseessessesseseessesssssessese 193  Hands free Answerback  PT only          c cccccceccssssesseesseeesecesecescensecnseceseeseeeesseeseeenaes 194  Hands free Operation  PT only            cecccesccescesssceseeseeeseceseeeseensecesaesereeeeeeeeeeneeaes 195  Tntercoma Calling 220  T re a aa e Siceeen tuts clea dh Soles sldetaleastesee wins tte ele aa 197    User Manual    Table of Contents          4 3 53 Live Call Screening  LCS   PT only          cccccccecsesseesseeteceteceeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeensees 199  AB DA  Lockout  ees aa scare eee gece a eaa AEA E E T an Snead toviductacehe E 206  453 55  Lo gelin  Log O   a a A E ean a aE 207  43 56  Message Wating menden ana ai iene Te EE E denies ER E a aS 209  4 3 57 Microphone Mute  PT only           ccccccecsccsseccseceneceeeeeseececeseeesaecseceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaees 213  4 3 58 Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service       cccceccccsecessesteestecnecceseceeeeeeeceeeeeseesseeeteeesaees 214  4 3 59 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA          ccccccecsecsseeescerecsseeneecesecneeneeeeneessneeeaees 219  4 3 60 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     Whisper  PT only           cccceeceeseeeteees 223  4 3 61 Off Hook Monitor  PT only     cccccccccsceessecsecesecceseeeeeeeeeeseecseecseceseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeesaees 227  4 3 62 One Touch Dialing  PT only     ccc ccccscceseeeeeceeeeeseeeseenseceseccsecseeeeeeeeseeeseenseeesaees 229  43 63  Operator Galll
164. eously      Executive Busy Override  Privacy Release  A 3 party conference call is also established by Executive Busy Override or Privacy  Release   e Confirmation tone  When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party conference call or vice versa  a confirmation  tone is sent to all three parties  Eliminating the tone is programmable    lt PT gt   e Pressing a CO button which is not in the conference  allows you to exit from the  conference leaving the other two parties connected unless they both are on outside lines   If they both are on outside lines  they will be disconnected   e You can return to the original party before the third party answers by pressing the  TRANSFER button   e CONF button is not provided on your KX T7250  However  it can be assigned to a  flexible  CO  DSS  PF  button by Station  User or System Programming      lt SLT gt   e You can return to the original party before the third party answers by flashing the  hookswitch      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment    4 3 33  4 3 42  4 3 43  4 3 72    User Manual    Conference  Unattended  PT only    Executive Busy Override     Extension   Executive Busy Override     Outside Line  PT only   Privacy Release  PT only     161    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3
165. er    Automatically saves the last outside call number you dialed so that you can make a call to the  same party later with a simple operation     SLT and ISDN Telephone    REDIAL    gt          Lift the handset or press Press REDIAL  Lift the handset   SP PHONE MONITOR        Conditions  e Up to 24 digits can be stored and redialed  this does not include an outside line access code       X         PAUSE   and  INTERCOM   for secret dialing  are counted as one digit        The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit sent to an  outside line is dialed  Dialing an outside line access code alone does not change the  memorized number      lt PT gt      Ifyou hear a busy tone when attempting to redial  select another line and press the  REDIAL button      lt SLT and ISDN Telephone gt   e Ifyou hear a busy tone when attempting to redial  select another line and dial         256 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 76 Redial  Saved Number  PT only     Allows you to store a telephone number during the conversation  so that you can redial the  same party later with a simple operation  The saved number can be redialed until another  number is stored     Storing    During a conversation or while hearing a busy tone   AUTO DIAL  SAVE     STORE  Press STORE  Press SAVE  flexible button         Dialing    O          Lift the handset or press Press SAVE  flexible button    SP PHONE MONITOR        Conditions     Up to 24 digit
166. er Manual          APPENDIX                                  English Display French Display Description   External BGM On MUS  EXT  OUI Start BGM through external pager        Background Music  BGM      External    Extrnl Page All RECH EXT    TOUS Access to  Paging     External     to all  external pagers     Extrnl Page 1 RECH  EXT  Access to  Paging     External     to a  specific external pagers     FWD  ALL  Ext123 RNV  TOUS  PST123 Complete to set  Call Forwarding     All    Calls      Confirm key programming on the FWD   DND button        FWD  B NA  Ext100    RNV  O SR  PST100    Complete to set  Call Forwarding     Busy   No Answer      Confirm key programming on the FWD   DND button              FWD  BSY  Ext234 RNV  OCC  PST234 Complete to set  Call Forwarding     Busy    Confirm key programming on the FWD   DND button    FWD  CO  91201431  RNV LR  91201431 Complete to set  Call Forwarding     to    Outside Line      Confirm key programming on the FWD   DND button        FWD  From  Ext123    RNV  DE  PST123    Complete to set  Call Forwarding     Follow  Me         FWD  NA  Ext345    RNV  SR  PST345    Complete to set  Call Forwarding     No  Answer      Confirm key programming on the FWD   DND button        FWD Cancel E123    ANNUL  RNV   P123    Cancel  Call Forwarding     Follow Me  All  Calls   at another extension        FWD DND Cancel       ANNULER RNV NPD    Cancel  Call Forwarding  or  Do Not Disturb   DND          Gone Home    Gone Home    Absent Message 2  
167. er Programming          User Manual References  4 3 80 System Speed Dialing  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    82 User Manual    User Programming          3 2 4  003  Extension Number Set    Description    Assigns an extension number to each extension     Selection    e Jack number   KX TD816   01 through 16   1    2   KX TD1232   01 through 64   1    2     1   first part   2   second part       Extension Number  2 through 4 digits    Default  KX TD816  Jack 01 1 through 16 1   101 through 116   Jack 01 2 through 16 2   201 through 216  KX TD1232  Jack 01 1 through 64 1   101 through 164   Jack 01 2 through 64 2   201 through 264    User Manual 83    User Programming          Programming    Display PT    Lo JLo  Ls      Dial 003      lt PT Display gt     Press NEXT      lt PT Display gt           003 EXT NUMBE                      Jack NO   gt           extension no     Enter the extension no     e To delete the current entry  press CLEAR     Press STORE     Enter a jack number     e To enter jack number 01  you can  also press NEXT       To select the second part   2   press  NEXT after entering the jack number      lt PT Display Example gt           EXT101              lt To continue  gt   When SELECT is pressed        e To change the current entry  press CLEAR    and enter the new name     Press END     Conditions    NEXT    SELECT    jack no     Enter the desired  jack number        
168. erred Line Assignment      Outgoing An idle outside line GO  E   Which line do you prefer to        seize when you go off hook A pre assigned outside line  fete   3   01 08  for KX TD816   to make calls  01 48  for KX TD1232                                      The Intercom line  1   Com                50 User Manual    Station Programming       Selection Programming Input       Preferred Line Assignment      Incoming   Which line do you prefer to  seize when you go off hook  to receive calls     Full One Touch Dialing  Assignment   Which way do you prefer to  dial the One Touch Dialing  feature     Intercom Alert Assignment  Which way do you prefer to  receive an intercom call     Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment  Do you prefer to distinguish the   Call Waiting tone from an outside  line and an intercom call     Live Call Screening Mode Set  Which voice mail service do  you prefer when a caller is  recording a message in your  mailbox     Initial Display Selection  Which display do you prefer  when a call is received     Bilingual Display Selection  Which language display do  you prefer     Handset Headset Selection  Which equipment will you  use as a receiver           No line    2  4           A ringing line                   A pre assigned outside line    Going Off hook and then pressing  the One Touch Dialing button      2  12   Outside line no    2   3   01 08  for KX TD816     01 48  for KX TD1232                    Pressing the One Touch  Dialing button     Ringing  
169. ers in the room  When you activate Microphone Mute  you  can still listen to your caller s voice but your caller cannot hear your voice     Setting    During a conversation in the hands free mode     AUTO ANSWER    MUTE  Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE       The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light flashes red slowly        Canceling    When microphone mute is established     AUTO ANSWER    MUTE  Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE     e The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off        Conditions     This feature is only available during a hands free conversation      This feature is not available for KX T7250     User Manual 213    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 58 Night   Day  Lunch   Break  Service    This system supports both the night and day modes of operation  The day mode includes the  lunch and break modes  The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be  changed depending on the mode  You can transfer received outside calls to assigned extension  groups while in the lunch or break mode  Toll restriction calls can be programmed to prevent  unauthorized toll calls at night  The Day Lunch Break Night modes can be switched manually  at any desired time by a pre assigned extension user  operator or manager  The operator or  manager can perform the operation using the display    If the Night button is assigned  its lighting patterns and status are as follows     Off  Day Lunch Break mode  Red  Night mode    Switching the mode  Display operation     7235 
170. erwrites the oldest    call   Default Record the new call    You can also modify the logged numbers for callback purpose     Setting overwriting the call log    7230   7235   7433   7436    h    Confirmation tone  and dial tone    E gt  Pte     Lift the handset or press Dial 56     SP PHONE     Dial 1      lt PT Display Example gt                 Incoming Log On       Canceling overwriting the call log  Disregarding the 31st call   7230   7235   7433   7436         ON    Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE     Confirmation tone  and dial tone    Dial 56      lt PT Display Example gt                 Incoming Log Off                   v  6b  Hang up or press   SP PHONE     v  Gb  Hang up or press   SP PHONE       The Caller ID service provides you with a caller   s information  such as his her name and telephone number  on the outside line  assigned to receive Caller ID service calls  Refer to  Caller ID Service  in the Features Guide for further information     315    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Logging a call information while talking    KX T7433   KX T7230   While receiving an incoming outside call  the  display shows the caller   s telephone number and  name     ODA Aa asa  JOHN WHITE                                     To answer  go off hook     OT TTA at  INFO LOG    Pressing the INFO  S1  To record the  button provides you information  with further information     once  caller s name     twice  call duration time                      
171. eseessees 156  Conberen Ce ites ahs yeei iiie ventana EEE needs AEE teeta bat EE E EE E net 158  Conference  Unattended  PT only            cccccccecesceseesseceseessecseeseecnsecnseeeseesseeeseeeaees 162  CTI  Computer Telephony Integration  Code Entry           ccccecccsseesseeteeeteetteeesees 164  Data Eine Securitiysas   ccefizeitiaeceviths a iii oeee a Ea a aa 165  Direct Inward System Access  DISA        cccccccccssesseceseceeeeeseceeeeeeecssenseeensesneeenneesaes 167  Do Not Disturb   DND  seeiectsiess nnna devas E EE E N aA 171  Do Not Disturb  DND  Override          cccccccccssseeseceeeceteceseeeeeessecaaeecscenseenseeneeeneeeaes 174  Doorphone  Call  iosa a a a e ek ate ieee TOS 176  Electronic Station Lockout            cccceccccsscesceseeesseeseceeecnscseecseeceeeeeseesaeeeseeeeeneeenes 180  Emergency Call  monina no n e A E E E 182  Executive Busy Override     Extensioni        ccccccsccescssssesseesseeeseeseecsteeseecnseenseenseenes 183  Executive Busy Override     Outside Line  PT only           cccccscccscceseeeeseeteeeeeeeeees 185  Executive Busy Override Deny   0       cccccccccssesseesseceseeeeceececeseeesecsaecsseneeenseeneeenneeaes 187  External P  ature ACCeSs cise sirens edhiuedeceasecnes oe E e a O EEE EEEE 188  External Modem Control  PT only          ccccccccssecseceseceeseeeeceeeeeeecsaeeaeensecnseenneeaes 190  Flash  PT Ony  r ara fers eared a neta eben i ok nee 191  Full One Touch Dialing  PT only          cccccecccceseceseceneceseeeeeeesecseeeese
172. ess  SP PHONE MONITOR  When canceling              Busy Ovrde Allow                Conditions    e Class of Service   Class of Service  programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     Programming Guide References   506  Executive Busy Override Deny    User Manual References  4 3 43 Executive Busy Override     Outside Line  PT only   4 3 42 Executive Busy Override     Extension  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 187    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 45 External Feature Access    Allows you to access special features  e g   Call Waiting  offered by a host PBX  Centrex or  Central Office  This feature is effective only during an outside call    You can access the feature by using either the FLASH or FLASH RCL button or the feature  number     7230   7235   7433   7436    During a conversation with an outside party     fs EA E3    Press EFA  S2   Enter the desired  service code        Using the FLASH button    During a conversation with an outside party        FLASH FLASH RCL             Press FLASH or FLASH RCL  Enter the desired  service code        The current call is placed on hold        Using the feature number    PT and SLT    During a conversation with an outside party     For PT    yY g co
173. ess 2 twice to display  B  items     344 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT               Using the Soft button or rotating Jog Dial directly        Third Display    WED Jan  1 03 00P                                     Extension STA Speed                Features SYS Speed  Call Log                                           Yoshida                              System Speed Dialing         Yoshida           m     a Zaydel co Zaydel  gt   Co  Adam co Adam or ON     Alice     Alice a      Ann Parker     Ann Parker  MENU MENU  AI      Ann Parker     Beth   1     Bob Jones   Q       Carol or   Y      Chris  MENU  System Speed Dialing Note    1  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired itemisat     the arrow     2  Press the CALL  S3  button or go off hook     Station Speed Dialing   Extension Dialing  1  Press the STA  S1  or EXT  S2  button     2  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at  the arrow     3  Press the CALL  S3  button or go off hook     User Manual    You can press the Function button  F1 through  F10  on the same line of the desired item  instead of the CALL  S3  button     For System Speed Dialing and Extension  Dialing  before rotating the Jog Dial  you can  press the corresponding alphabet key to select  the desired letter     lt Example gt  Press 2 twice to display  B  items     345    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 12  System Feature Access Menu    KX T7431   KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features      You can acce
174. ess Press DSS   Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR   flexible button   SP PHONE MONITOR        Conditions       Extension Number Assignment  Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions according to  003  Extension Number Set  in the Programming Guide     e Call Progress Tone  After dialing an extension number  you will hear one of the following tones   Ringback tone  Indicates the destination extension is being called   Confirmation tone  Indicates you can perform voice calling  e g   Paging    Busy tone  Indicates the destination extension is busy   Do Not Disturb  DND  tone  Indicates the destination extension has set the  Do Not  Disturb  DND   feature      lt PT gt   e Youcan assign a DSS button on a proprietary telephone  PT  or DSS Console by Station   User or System Programming   e Extension names can be given to all extensions by User or System Programming  An  extension number and a name  if programmed  are shown on the display PT during an  intercom call     User Manual 197    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           e Call Directory   Extension Dialing  With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436  or KX T7235  you can make an extension  call using the  Call Directory   Extension Dialing  display operation     Programming Guide References   003  Extension Number Set   004  Extension Name Set   012  ISDN Extension Number Set   013  ISDN Extension Name Set    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  3 2 4  003  Extension Number Set  3 2 5  004
175. ey to select  the desired letter    lt Example gt  Press 2 twice to display  B  items     2  Press the CALL  S3  button or go off hook     Station Speed Dialing   Extension Dialing  1  Press the STA  S1  or EXT  S2  button     2  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at  the arrow     3  Press the CALL  S3  button or go off hook     User Manual 343    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           KX T7436    Initial Display          WED Jan  1 03 00P    Extension STA Speed  Station Speed Dialing  Features SYS Speed  Call Log   CONT RING BGM                                                                                                                Extension Dialing             Yoshida   Zaydel      gt Adam   Alice                               Ann Parker  MENU       H OO000                Ann Parker  Beth    G  ee of ON    Chris    MENU  Extension Dialing   Station Speed Dialing   Note                                                                            System Speed Dialing e You can press the Function button  F1 through  1  Press the Extension  F3   STA Speed  F8  or F10  on the same line of the desired item  SYS Speed  F9  button  instead of the CALL  S3  button     2  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at    For System Speed Dialing and Extension  theartow  Dialing  before rotating the Jog Dial  you can    3  Press the CALL  S3  button or go off hook press the corresponding alphabet key to select  i 8 f the desired letter    lt Example gt  Pr
176. fan entered account code does not match the pre assigned account code  in the verified   all calls mode or the verified toll restriction override mode     a  When making an outside call  a reorder tone is returned     b  During a conversation  the code entry is accepted and the call is maintained    Option  mode      c  After a CPC signal   has been detected  the code entry is accepted    Option mode      e Account button  The Account button can be used instead of dialing the feature number  It can be assigned  to a flexible  CO  DSS  PF  button by Station  User or System Programming      lt SLT gt   e You cannot enter an account code during a call or while hearing a reorder tone        Flashing the hookswitch while entering an account code cancels the entry     Programming Guide References   105  Account Codes   508  Account Code Entry Mode   601  Class of Service    Features Guide References  Station Message Detail Recording  SMDR     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 83 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry         A Calling Party Control  CPC  signal is an on hook indication sent from a CO line when the other end hangs up  You hear a  reorder tone when then signal is detected     104 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 3 Alternate Calling     Ring   Voice    You can voice announce your intercom call or have the called extension ring  When you make  an intercom call by voice announcement  the other part
177. fer Recall Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 70 Phantom Extension    User Manual 157    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 32 Conference    During a two party conversation  you can add a third party to make a three party conference   The members of a conference on a line may be three extensions  one extension and two outside  lines  or two extensions and one outside line     To establish a conference    During a two party conversation     h    pdi   fp A three party  CONF ye     ha    x  oI   J  2 EE    Y  conference    is now established        Press CONF  Confirmation Dial the phone Talk tothe Press CONF  Confirmation  tone and dial number ofthe third party  tone  optional   tone third party     e The CONF indicator light turns steady red      The corresponding CO or INTERCOM  indicator light turns green     e You must dial a line access code  9 or 81 through 88   as the first digit when calling an outside party     e The current party is placed on hold   e The CONF indicator light flashes red slowly     During a two party conversation     h    qP pA Ls fo A three party  w z  phone no  aa fn   3 ie conference  lee   J  F    is now established                    Flash the Confirmation Dial the phone Talk to the   the Dial 3  Confirmation  hookswitch  tone and dial number of the third party  hookswitch  tone  optional   tone third party     e You must dial a line access code  9 or 81 through 88   as the first digit whe
178. ferences   206  Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time   503  Call Transfer to Outside Line   601  Class of Service    Features Guide References  Hold Recall    User Manual References  4 3 32 Conference         Class of Service  COS  is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions  Refer to  Class of Service   COS   in the Features Guide     User Manual 163    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 34 CTI  Computer Telephony Integration  Code Entry    If a CTI Service is used  a CTI Code  max  16 digits  can be sent from the KX TD816 KX   TD1232 to the CTI application  The code is interpreted by the application for suitable action   The feature number of CTI Code Entry is  Blank  by default    You must specify it by System Programming  For details  consult your manager or dealer     Entering CTI code    Any Telephone    l  C 1     Py    Lift the handset or press Dial feature number  Dial tone 3  Enter CTI code Dial     SP PHONE MONITOR   16 digits max       e You may dial 99   lt PT Display Example gt  instead of         Enter ID Code                       One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix        Programming Guide References   100  Flexible Numbering    164 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 35 Data Line Security    Your extension is protected against interruptions from the  Call Waiting    Hold Recall   and   Executive Busy Override  features  Data communication devi
179. g          To store a name        Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      7431   7433    Dial X X           station speed dial no        Enter a station speed dial  number  0 through 9        The STORE indicator light turns off      The display shows the current status    If nothing is stored   Not Stored  is displayed     lt PT Display Example gt             Name is now    Mike Graham programmed      CLR NEXT    desired name    Enter the name                 AUTO DIAL       STORE    Press STORE     MODE  next  L     Press NEXT  S3  or MODE         NEXT S3  button  for KX T7433 users      MODE button  for KX T7431 users      The STORE indicator lights      The display shows the initial  programming mode        Refer to the Combination Tables 1 and 2 in 2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name  Assignment  K X T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433 KX T7436 only  for information on how to    enter each character         To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     Combination Table    Each character can be entered by using the dial key pad  various buttons or the Jog Dial for    storing names     Combination Table 1 shows the combination of the keys and the number of times to press the  SELECT  AUTO ANSWER MUTE  button  or the combination of the key and the SHIFT and  Soft buttons to enter each character   The AUTO ANSWER MUTE button becomes the    SELECT button when using the overlay      To enter a character  find t
180. g    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call     Confirmation tone Wait for an  answer and talk     Receiving a voice announcement    If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call  you hear a  confirmation tone  Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller  two   way  and the third party  one way       lt PT Display Example gt   The caller s extension number or name is shown on the  display for five seconds in 10 seconds intervals     123 Tony                  Caller s extension number       To talk to the third party by terminating the current call in hands free mode    If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call  you hear a  confirmation tone  Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current caller  two   way  and the third party  one way         ss  Gba 7    Hang up  Speak with the third  party through microphone        The current call is disconnected  e You can talk in hands free     The INTERCOM indicator light mode   turns green        User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To talk to the third party after placing the current call on hold    If Whisper OHCA is activated by the other party when you are engaged in a call  you    hear a confirmation tone  Then you will be engaged in both calls with the current  caller  two way  and the third party  one way      HOLD E   E  a    Press HOLD        The current call is placed on hold     The INT
181. ge Waiting  MESSAGE  button    If there is a message in the mailbox  the MESSAGE indicator  light is on     MESSAGE    Lift the handset or press Press MESSAGE   SP PHONE MONITOR     e You can listen to the stored message        Manual dialing    Any Telephone       C   7 f        Voice Mail extension no        Lift the handset or press Enter the Voice Mail extension number   SP PHONE MONITOR     e You can listen to the stored message by  following the Voice Mail guidance        276 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions    Outside callers can leave their messages in your mailbox  When an incoming outside call  arrives  the Operator answers the call and transfers it to your extension  And         If you set the  Call Forwarding  function whose destination is Voice Mail    The call will be forwarded to Voice Mail automatically       If you do not set the  Call Forwarding  function    The Operator will retrieve the call  Then the Operator transfers the call to Voice Mail with  Voice Mail Transfer button     Voice Mail can be assigned as the destination of the following features   a  Call Forwarding     All Calls   b  Call Forwarding     Busy   c  Call Forwarding     No Answer   d  Call Forwarding     Busy No Answer   e  Intercept Routing    You can set the  Call Forwarding  function from an outside line following the guidance of  the Voice Processing System  VPS  depending on the Panasonic VPS type      lt PT gt     e A flexible button can be
182. ght  y  oO Gh    Lift the handset or press Press Night Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR   flexible button   and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR        The status of Night indicator     Day Lunch Break mode   Off  Night mode On  Red                       e The display shows the current mode        Switching Day Night modes  Feature number operation     Any Telephone    h  Day Mode l lp    a KE fo a    Night Mode  e  En chia  Lift the handset Dial 78    2   Lunch Mode Confirmation Hang up or press    Sf press tone SP PHONE MONITOR   SP PHONE MONITOR    3   Break Mode          Enter the desired mode  number  0 to 3      e The display shows the current mode        Confirming the current mode  Display PT  When the telephone is idle        The display shows the current mode for three seconds        216 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions     The following items have separate day and night programming    a  Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment  b  Direct In Lines  DIL   c  Doorphone Ringing Assignment  d  Extension Ringing Assignment  e  Ringing  Delayed  f  Toll Restriction Level  g  Direct Inward Dialing  DID   h  Intercept Routing  i  Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment for ISDN Extension       Inthe lunch break mode  the DIL 1 1 destination of  457 458  or  467 468  is effective  if  it is not assigned  DIL 1 1  Day  DIL 1 N  Day  perform in the day mode as usual  Using  feature numbers  you can go from day mode
183. gt LR 02 Called by an outside line after a call is  transferred   234  Busy    234  OCCUPE Destination extension is busy after the call is  transferred   456  DND 456  NPD Destination extension is set to  Do Not  Disturb  DND   after the call is transferred   368 User Manual          APPENDIX          English Display    French Display    Description       Account    COMP TE    Confirm key programming on the Account  button        Alarm 10 15AM       AVERT  10 15AM    Complete to set or called by  Timed  Reminder   one time mode      Confirm  Timed Reminder  programming        Alarm 10 15AM     AVERT  10 15AM     Complete to set or called by  Timed  Reminder   everyday mode      Confirm  Timed Reminder  programming        Alarm Cancelled    AVERT  ANNULE    Cancel  Timed Reminder         Alarm Not Stored       AVERT  NON REGLE    Confirm  Timed Reminder  programming  when it is not stored              All Call Page    RECH INT ET EXT       Access to  Paging     All                              At Ext 123 At Ext 123 Absent Message 3   Back at 11 00 Back at 11 00 Absent Message 4   BGM On MUSIQUE  OUI Start BGM   BGM Off MUSIQUE  NON Stop BGM        Break Mode    MODE DEJEUNER    Complete to set  Break Mode         Busy    OCCUPE    Resource is busy        Busy Ovrde Allow    ENT  TIERS OUI    Cancel  Executive Busy Override Deny         Busy Ovrde Deny       ENT  TIERS NON    Complete to set  Executive Busy Override  Deny         C Pickup Allow    PRSE APPL OUI    Cancel  Call 
184. h the touch of a button     Co     Press a flexible button assigned as One Touch Dialing   Phantom  DSS  REDIAL  or SAVE     e The SP PHONE indicator light turns red      The CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns green        Conditions  e DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also activate this feature        This feature must be initially assigned by Station Programming  Full One Touch Dialing  Assignment      User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 62 One Touch Dialing  PT only   4 3 70 Phantom Extension  4 3 75 Redial  Last Number  4 3 76 Redial  Saved Number  PT only     192 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 49 Handset Microphone Mute  PT only     Allow you to turn off the handset microphone so you can consult privately with others in the  room  You will still be able to hear the other party  This feature is only available for KX T7400  series telephone users     Setting    While on a handset call     AUTO ANSWER    MUTE  Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE       The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light flashes red slowly        Canceling    When handset microphone mute is established     AUTO ANSWER    MUTE  Press AUTO ANSWER MUTE    e The AUTO ANSWER MUTE indicator light turns off        Conditions     This feature is only available during a conversation with the handset     User Manual References  4 3 57 Microphone Mute  PT only     User Manual 193    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 50 Han
185. hantom number must be assigned by System Programming before assigning the  Phantom Extension button by Station Programming or System Programming     e Ifseveral extensions have the same phantom extension number  they will ring  simultaneously         A maximum of 128 phantom numbers can be assigned by System Programming      The Phantom button cannot be used for feature settings such as  Call Forwarding      e Itis programmable not to ring the extension when a call is received at a phantom extension  by Station Programming     e Phantom Extension button on a DSS Console   Allows the operator to transfer a call to a phantom extension by the Phantom Extension  button on the DSS Console     Programming Guide References   005  Flexible CO Button Assignment   124  Phantom Extension Number Assignment    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  2 2 3 Phantom Extension Ringing On Off Set    User Manual 249    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 71 Pickup Dialing  Hot Line     You can make a call to the pre programmed party simply by going off hook     Programming the phone number    Any Telephone    h    pei g  2 CE         y chia    Lift the handset or press Dial 742  Enter the phone number  Dial    Confirmation Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  tone and SP PHONE MONITOR   dial tone    e You must dial a line access code  9 or 81 through 88  as the  first digit when storing an outside phone number        Setting   Canceling  Any Telephone    v  fl
186. he key and number of times to press the SELECT button or the  corresponding SHIFT and Soft button combination from the table  Press the corresponding key  first  then press the SELECT button the required number of times  Or you can use the SHIFT  button and a Soft button  S1 through S3  instead of the SELECT button     62    User Manual    Station Programming          Combination Table 2 shows the combination of keys and the number of pulses to move the  Jog Dial  click tones  to the right  To enter a character  find the key and number pulses to rotate  the Jog Dial  Press the corresponding key first  then rotate the Jog Dial the required number of  times  Or  if you keep rotating the Jog Dial after pressing any dialing key  all of the characters  in the table will be displayed     Combination Table 1                                                                            SHIFT  amp  S1 SHIFT S2 SHIFT S3  SHIFT   SHIFT    SHIFT   Soft  S1   S2 S3 SHIFT    SHIFT   Combination S1 S2  Pressing  SELECT   Times   0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  Keys  1 1 Q q Z Z      2 2 A a B b C c  3 3 D d E e F f  4 4 G g H h I i  5 5 J j K k L l  6 6 M m N n O o  7 7 P p Q q R r S s  8 8 T t U u V v  9 9 W w X x Y y Z Z  0 0   i    x          gt   lt   gt            amp                      If your telephone is a KX T7431  do not use the provided SELECT button  Use the AUTO ANSWER    MUTE button which becomes the SELECT button when using the overlay     User Manual 63    Station Programming          Com
187. he system clock must be set correctly beforehand      There is no limit to the number of the extensions who can set the Timed Reminder at the  same time   e Only the latest time setting is valid at the extension whether it was set by the extension user   Timed Reminder  or by the Manager extension or an Operator  Timed Reminder  Remote         Station Message Detail Recording  SMDR   SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information  date  time   extension number  start no answer   It is programmable to be printed out when the Timed  Reminder starts and the alarm is not answered  Refer to  Station Message Detail Recording   SMDR   in the Features Guide for further information     Programming Guide References   000  Date and Time Set   217  Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 81 Timed Reminder    User Manual 311    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5    4 5 1    312    Special Display Features    Special Display Features    With the display telephone  KX T7230  KX T7235  KX T7431  KX T7433 or KX T7436  you    can easily access several features     The display telephones have the ability to perform the following features     Feature  Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb    KX T7230    KX T7235    KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436       Call Log  Incoming       Call Log Lock  Incoming       Call Log  Outgoing  Call Monitoring in Station Hunting       Call Directory       Extension Dialing    
188. hone is provided with a display  display DPT   the volume level  is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks  For ringer volume adjustment  three  levels  OFF LOW HIGH  are available with the KX T7420 and KX T7425     To adjust the handset receiver volume    Display PT       On    rO    Q    Lift the handset  Rotate Jog Dial in the desired direction      lt PT Display Example gt   Handset              volume level 3        e You may also adjust the handset receiver volume during a conversation using the  handset receiver     User Manual 33    DPT Overview          To adjust the headset volume  Display PT    Be sure the headset is connnected     7    SP PHONE    Press SP PHONE  Rotate Jog Dial in the desired direction      lt PT Display Example gt   Headset               volume level 3        To adjust the ringer volume    7433   7436  While the telephone is ringing        On    Rotate Jog Dial in desired direction      lt PT Display Example gt     ae Gime GOs    7433   7436  While the telephone is idle and on hook           Ow    RING    Press RING  S2   Rotate Jog Dial in the desired direction       The telephone will ring    The telephone will stop ringing in about 4 seconds     When the volume level is 0  no     indication   the    display shows  RNGOFF         34 User Manual    DPT Overview       While the telephone is idle and on hook        Ow    Press MODE five times  Rotate Jog Dial in the desired direction         The telephone will stop ringing in about 4
189. hrough 8      e The STORE indicator lights     The display shows the current   The display shows the initial  status  programming mode     e The display shows the selected tone type number and you hear  the selected tone until the STORE button is pressed    lt PT Display Example gt        Tone Type X   x tone type number                If you want to change the tone type  enter another tone type  number         To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual    Station Programming          2 2 6 Self Extension Number Confirmation    Allows you to display your extension port physical number and extension number         Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9      Le      Press HOLD  END       lt PT Display Example gt    The display shows the initial programming    Jack01 lt   gt EXT101 mode   extension port  physical number                             To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual 57    Station Programming          2 2 7 Station Programming Data Default Set    Allows you to return each of the following items assigned by Station Programming to their  default settings     a  Bilingual Display Selection  default  English    b  Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment  default  Tone 1    c  Full One Touch Dialing Assignment  default  on    d  Handset Headset Selection  default  Handset    e  Initial Display Selection  default  Caller ID    f  Intercom
190. ically disconnected      lt PT gt     e With outside calls  you can put multiple calls on hold  However  with intercom calls  you  can put only one call on hold      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   200  Hold Recall Time    Features Guide References  Hold Recall    User Manual References  4 3 18 Call Hold Retrieve    User Manual 129    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 17 Call Hold  Exclusive  PT only     Allows you to prevent other extension users from retrieving your held call  A call put on  exclusive hold can only be retrieved from the extension that placed it on hold     To place a call on exclusive hold    During a conversation     HOLD HOLD   The CO or INTERCOM indicator light  flashes green moderately   Press HOLD  Press HOLD again     The current call is placed on exclusive hold        The CO or INTERCOM indicator light flashes green slowly      The current call is placed on hold        Retrieving a call on exclusive hold     CO  INTERCOM  or CLL     The CO or INTERCOM indicator light turns steady green     Press the CO or INTERCOM e You can talk to the held party again   which is on exclusive hold        Conditions   e What if a call on Exclusive Hold is not retrieved   If a call on Exclusive Hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time  default  60 s   Hold  Recall  if the extension is on hook  or Hold Warning tone  if engaged in another call  rings  the extensio
191. ication Presentation  CLIP     When you make an outside call through a Prime Rate Interface  PRI  ISDN line  you can let  the other party see your pre assigned identification number  You can select to show an  identification number assigned for a PRI ISDN line or your extension  This is one of the ISDN    supplementary service     To select a CLIP number for an outside line    Any Telephone    h     3o oo  Y    Lift the handset or press Dial 7111  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone     lt PT Display Example gt   CLIP CO                   To select a CLIP number for an extension  Any Telephone        ON    Lift the handset or press Dial 7110  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone     lt PT Display Example gt        CLIP  EXT                      Conditions          y  Gla  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     y  Gla  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        The above settings are available only when  ISDN  is selected in program  420  ISDN Ring  Service Assignment  In case that  Regular  is selected in program  420   the number    assigned in program  418  is sent as the CLIP number      CLIP Numbers for PRI ISDN Lines    When you make an outside call using a PRI ISDN line  one of the following numbers   depending on your choice  is displayed on the telephone of the other party as the CLIP    number     152    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           a  CLIP number assigned to the outside line  The number stored in progra
192. ignaled     e Confirmation Tone  A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user before being connected to the caller   Eliminating the tone is programmable     Programming Guide References   407 408  DIL 1 1 Extension   409 410  Intercept Extension   813  Floating Number Assignment   990  System Additional Information       Day   Night  Day   Night       Features Guide References  Floating Station          1 A Floating Number  FN  is a virtual extension number which appears to be an extension  Refer to  Floating Station  in the  Features Guide     User Manual 271    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 86 Two Way Recording into Voice Mail     PT only     Allows you to record a conversation into your mailbox or the desired mailbox     Recording into your mailbox    During a conversation      Two Way Rec     A    Press Two Way Record   flexible button      e The Two Way Record indicator light turns red        Stopping recording     Two Way Rec     Press Two Way Record   flexible button  again     e The Two Way Record indicator light turns off            Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice  Processing System  one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100      272 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Recording into the mailbox of another extension    During a conversation      Two Way Tran   DSS     extension no    or   
193. il Recording  SMDR   SMDR automatically records the detailed Timed Reminder information  data  time   extension number  start no answer   It is programmable by System Programming to print  out when the Timed Reminder starts and the alarm is not answered        Setting a new time clears the preset time    e Timed Reminder Ringing Time  The alarm continues for a specified period of time  default  30 s    This period of time can be changed by System Programming      lt PT gt   e Ifan alarm time has not been set  the display shows the following   Alarm Not Stored  e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 and KX T7235  you can set or cancel the  Timed Reminder using the display operation    lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones                 Programming Guide References   000  Date and Time Set   217  Timed Reminder Alarm Ring Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  3 2 1  000  Date and Time Set  4 4 6 Outgoing Message  OGM   4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 267    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 82 Toll Restriction Override     SUMMARY    There are two types of toll restriction override     Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry    Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing    268 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 83
194. inside   outside  on hold temporarily  Consultation Hold        TRANSFER e You are connected to the Ist caller     Pressing the TRANSFER button alternates  Press TRANSFER  between two callers     e Flashing the hookswitch alternates between two    yY e You are connected to the 1st caller   Eza   callers     Flash the hookswitch        When you are engaged in the 2nd call  inside   while placing the 1st call  inside  on   exclusive  hold    Between two extensions   HOLD     e Pressing the HOLD button alternates    between two callers   Press HOLD        When you are engaged in the 2nd call  inside outside   while placing the 1st call  inside   outside  on  exclusive  hold     CO  INTERCOM  or    e Repeating these operations  steps 1 and 2   Press HOLD  Press CO or INTERCOM  alternates between two callers        Conditions     This feature does not work during a doorphone call or paging          Consultation Hold places a call on hold temporarily to transfer it or makes a Conference call or Call Splitting     140 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features Guide References  Consultation Hold    User Manual References  4 3 16 Call Hold  4 3 17 Call Hold  Exclusive  PT only     User Manual 141    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 25 Call Transfer     to Extension    Allows you to transfer the call you received to another extension  There are two ways   Screened Call Transfer  The destination confirms the transfer before you send i
195. ion  DPT SLT           Retrieving a parked call    PT and SLT    h  S He  PON  5  L2   i J  You can talk    to the party     Lift the handset or press Dial 52  Enter a parking zone number Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR   0 through 9  where the call  optional   is parked     e If there is no held call  you will hear a reorder tone    lt PT Display Example gt     No Held Call                   Conditions    e Call Park Recall  If a parked call is not retrieved in a specific period of time  default  12 rings    Call Park  Recall  occurs  If a parked call is an outside call  it is possible to select whether  Call Park  Recall  will go to the initiating extension or to Operator 1 by System Programming  If a  parked call is an intercom call   Call Park Recall  will return to the initiating extension        Automatic Disconnection  If a parked call is not retrieved in 30 minutes  it is automatically disconnected     e Confirmation Tone  A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the parked call  Eliminating  the tone is programmable      lt PT gt      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 and KX T7235  you can execute this  feature using the display operation      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   219  Call Park Recall Time   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T743
196. ion 244  PAUSE 26   PF 355   Phantom Extension 29  246   Phantom Extension Ringing On Off Set 54  Pickup Dialing  Hot Line  250  Preferred Line Assignment 50  Privacy Release 252   Private mode 199   PROGRAM 26   Programming Methods 72  Programming Mode Display 44  Pulse to Tone Conversion 254    Q    Quick Dialing 255    R  Receiving Calls 97  REDIAL 26    Redial  Last Number 256   Redial  Saved Number 257   RELEASE 355   Remote Station Lock 180   Remote Station Lock Control 300   Ring Voice Intercom Alerting Mode Override  194   Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons 55   Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls 56    S   SAVE 29  Secret Dialing 258  SELECT 26    Self Extension Number Confirmation 57  SHIFT 26    385    Index          Single CO 29   Soft buttons 26   Special Display Features 312   SP PHONE 27   Station Message Detail Recording  SMDR  267   Station Program Clear 259   Station Programming Data Default Set 58   Station Programming Instructions 44  356   Station Speed Dialing 261   Station Speed Dialing Number Name  Assignment 59   System Feature Access Menu 326  338   System Speed Dialing 263   System Speed Dialing Name Set 80   System Speed Dialing Number Set 77   System Working Report 301    T    Timed Reminder 265  Timed Reminder  Remote  Wake Up Call  304  Toll Restriction Override by Account Code  Entry 269  Toll Restriction Override for System Speed  Dialing 270  Toll Restriction Override     SUMMARY 268  Tone List 379  TRANSFER 27  Troubleshooting 381  
197. ion Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 1 Before Operating  4 1 1 Before Operating    What kind of telephone do you use     In this manual  you will find your way to operate the feature depending on the telephone you  use  Please use the proper operation for your telephone     If you use a Panasonic proprietary telephone which has the special function button and or  the display  you will follow the operation with the button or display for easy access       Ifyou use a Panasonic proprietary telephone which does not have the function button   you may change one of the unused buttons to another button  Refer to 2 2 Station  Programming    e A Panasonic proprietary telephone has the Light Emitting Diode  LED  button  indicators  so you can see the line conditions by the lighting patterns    e If  Idle Line Preference     Outgoing    No Line Preference     Outgoing  or  Prime  Line Preference  CO Line      Outgoing  is assigned on the extension  it is not possible  to have access to any DPT features after simply going off hook  To access DPT features   press the INTERCOM button after going off hook     If you use single line devices such as a single line telephone or data terminal  you will follow  the steps which enter the feature number      Ifyou use a dial pulse  DP  type single line device which does not have the     and      keys  it is impossible to access features that have    or     in their feature numbers   e When the  Pickup Dialing  Hot Line   feature is set o
198. ion level  Once  this option is set  it permits all extension users to make  System Speed Dialing  calls with no  restrictions  You can override toll restriction for  System Speed Dialing  through System  Programming     Programming Guide References   300  TRS Override for System Speed Dialing    Features Guide References  Toll Restriction    User Manual References  4 3 80 System Speed Dialing    270 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 85 Trunk Answer From Any Station  TAFAS     Allows you to answer an incoming outside call  paged through an external pager  from any  extension     Any Telephone    While hearing a tone from the external pager     S  ON  4   2   external pager no        Lift the handset or press Dial 42  Enter an external pager Confirmation  SP PHONE MONITOR  number  1 for KX TD816   tone  optional   1 through 4 for KX TD1232      e You are connected to the ringing line  and can talk to the caller        Conditions     TAFAS can be used in the following cases     a  The floating number    of an external pager is assigned as the Direct in Lines  DIL  1 1  destination  In this case all of the incoming calls on the specified line will be signaled     b  A DISA  Direct Inward System Access  caller dials the floating number of an external  pager  for the KX TD1232 only      c  The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the Intercept Routing  destination  In this case incoming calls redirected to the destination will be s
199. ion tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE   000 through 999  twice  and dial tone SP PHONE               lt PT Display Example gt     Log Locked  XXX    Lock code you dialed                   Unlocking    7230   7235   7433   7436  h    roy  5    7   lock cod a D  ock code  tY Gba  Lift the handset or press Dial 57  Enter the same lock code Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE  you used to lock the extension  and dial tone SP PHONE         lt PT Display Example gt           Unlocked             Conditions    e Call Log Lock Control  Incoming  The Manager or an Operator can unlock the call log display for any extension  if you forget  your lock code  Call Log Lock Control  Incoming         With the KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature using the  display operation     Programming Guide References  e  100  Flexible Numbering  e  406  Caller ID Assignment    User Manual 321    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           User Manual References  e 44 3 Call Log Lock Control  Incoming  e 4 5 3 Call Log  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235   KX T7230 only   e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu       45 12 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access  Menu    322 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 5 Call Log  Outgoing  KX T7436   KX T7235 only     Last five CO calls you made are automatically logged  You can make a call using the call log     Initial Display    WED
200. is c sc ccctvcsrtiavedecesteced Saecaccioesdadlved A e aidsi r leva teeleas ox 230  4 3 64 Outward Dialing  Line Access     SUMMARY         ccccccccesseeteceeeeeeeeseceeeeeeneennees 231  4 3 65 Paging     SUMMARY  o    ecccccssssccesscesceeseecseceseceseeseeseneceseeeseeesecaecnseseaeseseesaeesaeens 234  43 66  Pagni     ANSWER a a eee ce case Saa a eat Te aE Bs DIG aaa eR RSE oe 238  4 3 67 Paging     Deny  PT only  e e e a s 239  4 3 68 Paging and Transfetsisnsnaninnn a A a E R A 240  4 3 69 Paralleled Telephone Connection           cccccccceccessseessesteeeeeseceseceeeceseceeeeeseesseeeeeessees 244  43 70 Phantom EXtenSion naerenn enei egies a ieee e a EEEa TEES 246  43 71  Pickup Dialing  Hot Line Jeice tuun E a EE 250  4 3 72 Privacy Release  PT only         ccceccecccecseceseceseeeneceseeeseeeseenseceseecseceaeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeesaees 252  43 73 Puls   to  Tone  Conversion sssrinin a a ae 254  43 14     Quick Dialim ga sni ea aaa a a e e i 255  437S Redial  Last NU DET a a a aa aa aa a aa Aaaa Saai 256  4 3 76 Redial  Saved Number  PT only   0       ccecccccscesseescsesecsceesseceseceeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeneenaeees 257  43 77 Secret Dialing  PT Only  i nnna a E a a E osatedencde 258  4 3 78 Station Program Clear         cccccccsccessessseesecsteceseeeneceeeceeeeeeseceseceecseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeaees 259  4 3 79 Station Speed Dialing          ccccecccesceessessecsseceteeeeeceseeeeeeeneeseecsaecesseeeenseseeeeeseenseeaeens 261  4 3 80 System Speed Dialing sirimiri o n e E a e iias 
201. isplay Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 149    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 28 Call Waiting from Central Office    During a conversation  a call waiting tone offered by the local Central Office signals your  extension that there is another call waiting  You can answer the second call by placing the first  call on hold     7230   7235   7433   7436    While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset     FEA    2     Press EFA S2      e The current call is placed on hold and you can  talk to the second caller        Using the FLASH button    While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset     FLASH FLASH RCL  or    Press FLASH or FLASH RCL     e The current call is placed on hold and  you can talk to the second caller        Using the feature number    While hearing a Call Waiting tone through the handset     Y  e   e    Flash the hookswitch     e The first party is placed on hold  e You can talk to the second party        150 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions  e This is an optional telephone company service   For more information  consult the local telephone company    lt PT gt   e You can return to the original party by pressing the FLASH or FLASH RCL or EFA  S2   button again    lt SLT gt   e You can return to the original party by flashing the hookswitch and then dialing 6 again     User Manual 151    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 29 Calling Line Identif
202. l direct him or her to the pre determined destination  Intercept  Routing    Intercept Routing  is activated 5 seconds after  default  or immediately after  the playback depending on System Programming    e DISA User Code  You can store up to 32 programmable DISA user codes  These codes can have four to  ten digits  and they must be unique  You can assign a  Class of Service  number to each  code  The  Class of Service  appended to the code denies the  Toll Restriction     e DISA User Code Entry Failure  If the DISA caller fails to enter the valid DISA user code three times consecutively  the  call will be disconnected    e DISA built in Automated Attendant Number  This system supports up to ten programmable DISA built in auto attendant numbers   Each number must be one digit     User Manual 169    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           The DISA built in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other  numbers  extension number  Floating Number  etc    To avoid confusion  the system  waits for the second digit for a pre programmed amount of time  default  1 s   If the  second digit is not dialed until the timer expires  the system assumes that the first digit  is a DISA built in auto attendant number     e DISA Call Duration  Extending the call duration can be enabled  from 1 to 7 minutes  or disabled by System  Programming  The caller can extend the call duration up to 10 times  or as many times  as the caller wants  no limit  depending on System
203. l the absent message   Absent MSG On    1 9  ABST MSG On 1 9 Set an absent message   Busy Ovrd Deny     1 0  BSY Ovr DNY 1 0 Deny or allow other people from  joining your conversation   C Pickup CO C Pickup CO Pick up a CO call for another  extension   C Pickup Deny   s1 0  C PickupDNY 1 0 Deny or allow other people from  picking up your calls              User Manual    347    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Display   KX 1T7436 KX T7235     Display     KX T7431 KX T7433     Feature Description       C Pickup Direct     ext     C Pickup Group    C Waiting  0 3     Call Park     0 9              Callback Busy Cancel       Data Line On Off     1 0     Door Open     1 8   Doorphone Call  1 8     Extrn BGM On Off    Extrn MODEM CTRL     1 5     LCS Password   sabcabc     Log Lock Call     abcabc        Log Ovrt On Off  1 0     Login Logout  1 0     Message Off     ext     Message On     ext     Night Mode  0 3     OGM Playback     1 4     OGM Recording      gt 1 4        Page Deny On Off    1 0        C PickupDRT ext    C Pickup GRP    C Waiting 0 3    Call Park 0 9             Callback Cancel       Data Line 1 0    Door Open 1 8       Doorphone 1 8    Ext BGM On Off    Extrn MODEM 1 5    LCS   abcabc    Log Lock abcabc       Log Ovrt 1 0    Login out 1 0    MSG Off ext    MSG On ext    Night Mode 0 3  OGM Play 1 4  OGM Record 1 4    Page Deny 1 0       Pick up a specific extension   s call     Pick up a call within your extension  group     Cancel or set the
204. lease refer to  LED Indication  in this section        You can set the G CO and L CO buttons on one telephone  Incoming and outgoing calls on  the line are shown on the button in the following priority   S CO  gt  G CO  gt  L CO    Single CO  S CO  button  An S CO button is a outside line access button  This allows you to access a specific outside  line by pressing an S CO button  An incoming outside call can be directed to an S CO button     Conditions     The same outside line cannot be assigned to more than one S CO button on a PT     e Itis possible to assign the same outside line to an S CO button  a G CO button and an L   CO button respectively     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 64 Outward Dialing  Line Access     SUMMARY    30 User Manual    DPT Overview          Group CO  G CO  button  To support efficient utilization of outside lines  a group of outside lines  outside line group  can  be assigned to a CO button  This button is referred to as Group CO  G CO  button  Any  incoming calls from any outside line in the same trunk group arrive at the G CO button  To  make a outside call  you can access an idle outside line in the trunk group by simply pressing  the assigned G CO button     Conditions  e Itis possible to assign the same outside line to an S CO button  a G CO button  and an L   CO button   e Itis necessary to program the extension for making and or receiving calls in outside line  groups     e When your extension is assigned as 
205. lection  You can select either to be ring signaled or voice signaled by Station Programming   Intercom Alert Assignment    The default is Ring Calling mode     User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  4 3 50 Hands free Answerback  PT only   4 3 52 Intercom Calling    106 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 4 Answering  Direct Outside Line  PT only     You can answer an outside call by pressing a flashing a CO button directly  You do not have to  lift the handset or press the SP PHONE MONITOR button     To answer an incoming outside call     CO     Press CO which is flashing green or red rapidly     e The indicator light turns green and a hands free conversation is established        Conditions    e You can choose the desired line to answer when more than one call is ringing on your PT  by this feature        There are three types of CO buttons  Group CO  G CO  button  Loop CO  L CO  button  and Single CO  S CO  button  These can be assigned to flexible CO buttons by Station   User or System Programming     User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 51 Hands free Operation  PT only     User Manual 107    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 5 Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On     Allows you to set to receive callback ringing when the dialed line becomes idle  When you  answer the callback ringing     For an extension  The called extension starts ringing without dialing   For an o
206. ll     a e    DND tone Wait for an answer and talk      lt PT Display Example gt   101  DND                   Conditions    e Class of Service  Class of Service  COS  programming determines the extension that can perform this  feature       Ifyou hear a reorder tone after dialing 1  your extension is not permitted to execute  Do Not  Disturb  DND  Override  feature by System Programming     e What if a busy tone is heard after DND override   The other extension in DND mode is busy   In this case  you may perform the following features       Automatic Callback  Camp on       Busy Station Signaling  BSS       Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     174 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT               Whisper OHCA      Executive Busy Override     lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   507  Do Not Disturb Override   601  Class of Service    User Manual References  4 3 37 Do Not Disturb  DND     User Manual 175    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 39 Doorphone Call    Allows you to have a conversation with a visitor at your doorphone  You can also unlock the  door from your telephone     Calling an extension from a doorphone     operation for a visitor    Doorphone    Press the Doorphone button for one second  Wait for an answer and talk        Answering a doorphone call  Any Telephone    When you hear the doorphone ring tone at the extension     Lift the handset or press S
207. ll One Touch Dialing  mode   Handset COMBINE Select Handset mode    Headset CASQUE Select Headset mode    Jack04  lt   gt  EXT104  10101  lt   gt  PST104 Confirm jack number and extension number        User Manual    373          APPENDIX                                                                                                          English Display French Display Description   Loop CoO BOUCLE DE LR Loop CO  L CO  button is assigned    Message Waiting MESS  EN ATTENTE Message Waiting  MESSAGE  button is  assigned    NIGNT NUIT Night button is assigned    Not Stored NON MEMORISE No programming is assigned    Pref In  CO 02 ENT PREF LR 02 Select  Prime Line  Outside Line  Preference      Incoming     Pref In  NO ENT   PREF   NON Select  No Line Preference     Incoming     Pref In  Ring ENT   PREF   SONN Select  Ring Line Preference     Incoming     Pref Out CO 02 SOR PREF LR 02 Select  Prime Line  Outside Line  Preference      Outgoing     Pref Out ICM SOR PREF  INTCM Select  Prime Line INTERCOM  Preference      Outgoing     Pref Out Idle SOR PREF LIB  Select  Idle Line Preference     Outgoing     Pref Out No SOR PREF   NON Select  No Line Preference     Outgoing     Save SAUVEGARDE SAVE button is assigned    Tone Call APPEL TON  Select Ring Calling mode    Tone Type 2 TON  TYPE 2 Select ringing tone for a CO button or  intercom calls    TRK GRP 3 GR LR 3 Group CO  G CO  button is assigned    VTR 101 TMV 101 Voice Mail  VM  Transfer button is assigned        Voice Call 
208. ll free  1 800 332 5368                             Part No  Picture Description Comment  KX JO7W B 213 36 cm  7 feet   KX J15W B Handset cord 457 2 cm  15 feet   KX J25W B 762 cm  25 feet        User Manual    Attention          W  White B Black    User Manual 5    Introduction          Introduction    Who Should Use This Manual    This manual is designed for users of Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD816 and KX   TD1232  It is to be used after the system is installed and System Programming is completed   The focus is Digital Proprietary Telephones  DPTs     KX T7220 KX T7230 K X T7235 KX T7250 KX T7420 K X T7425 KX T743 1   KX T7433 KX T7436  Digital DSS Consoles  KX T7240 KX T7440    KX T7441  Single Line Telephones  SLTs  and their features  The step by step procedures  required to activate each feature are discussed in detail  Illustrations of the KX TD816 and the  KX TD 1232 systems and the required System Programming are provided under separate cover  in the Installation Manual and the Programming Guide     Construction of This Manual  This manual consists of the following sections    Section 1  DPT Overview  Provides configuration information on DPTs  It provides an illustration of each telephone   identifies their feature buttons  supplies background information on these feature buttons  and  provides initial settings    Section 2  Station Programming  Provides the steps required to assign features to DPT flexible buttons and to the DPT system    Section 3  User Progr
209. lt PT Display Example gt        Extension   xxxx           Xxxx  extension number        Time  hh mm    AM PM  0 1   Daily Y N 1 0  0    CoJo J5 Pas    For one time alarm    Dial 0   S2  53  D Hang up or press  For daily alarm    Dial 1  tone and dial tone SP PHONE     Press PROG  S3                 You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared    2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled      lt PT Display Example gt           Alarm 01 00AM       only one time Alarm 01 00AM        daily                         304 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Setting    Press MODE until     Feature Access    is    displayed      DSS   or        Dial the desired extension  number or press DSS   flexible button      Lo Jela   For one time alarm    Dial 0   For daily alarm    Dial 1     Rotate Jog Dial until     R Timed Remind     is displayed     Enter the hour   01 through 12      Confirmation  tone and dial tone        gt R Timed Remind    SELECT MODE  a  Co    Press SELECT     Lo Jela    For AM  Dial 0   For PM  Dial 1     minute    Enter the minute   00 through 59      g  N   Hang up or press   SP PHONE        You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared    2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled      lt PT Display Example gt        Alarm 01 00AM             User Manual        only one ti
210. m  418  Outside Line Number Assignment for PRI CLIP     b  CLIP number assigned to the extension line  The Extension line number   stored in program  622  Extension CLIP Number Assignment  The ISDN Extension line number   stored in program  624  ISDN Extension CLIP Number Assignment       CLIP Number for BRI ISDN Line  When you make an outside call using a BRI ISDN line  the number stored in  DN    Directory Number  in program  454  DN Assignment is displayed on the telephone of the  other party as the CLIP number   In this case  operations on the previous page do not work        The CLIP number actually displayed on the telephone of the other party may be different  from the system programmed CLIP number depending on the contract with your ISDN  Service Provider     e Disabling the CLIP service  You can choose whether to utilize the CLIP service or not before making an outside call    Calling Line Identification Restriction  CLIR      Programming Guide References   418  Outside Line Number Assignment for PRI CLIP   420  ISDN Ring Service Assignment   454  DN Assignment   622  Extension CLIP Number Assignment        624  ISDN Extension CLIP Number Assignment    Features Guide References  Calling Line Identification Presentation  CLIP   Calling Line Identification Restriction  CLIR     User Manual References  4 3 30 Calling Line Identification Restriction  CLIR     User Manual 153    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 30 Calling Line Identification Restricti
211. me             Alarm 01 00AM        daily          305    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Setting       Press SHIFT  until    FEAT    is  displayed     Press FEAT     EE    Dial 1  Dial the desired extension  number or press DSS   flexible button      h    Lo Jela      For one time alarm    Dial 0   For daily alarm    Dial 1      DSS     extension no    or CO     Confirmation  tone and dial tone     gt R Timed Remind    Room Ready  MENU SEL      gt n ees oa       Rotate Jog Dial until Press SEL      R Timed Remind    is    at the arrow     hour    Enter the hour   01 through 12      Lo Jela      For AM  Dial 0   For PM  Dial 1       minute      Enter the minute   00 through 59      g  Ghd    Hang up or press  SP PHONE        You hear an alarm ringing at the preset time and then the setting is cleared    2 You hear an alarm ringing daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled      lt PT Display Example gt        Alarm 01 00AM             306        only one time          Alarm 01 00AM        daily             User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Setting    Any Telephone    o E  ee  o    Lift the handset Dial 7X1  Dial the desired extension Enter the hour  or press number or press DSS   01 through 12    SP PHONE MONITOR     h    pa  woe  CO  fof  A    Enter the minute For AM  Dial 0  For a one time alarm    Dial 0  Confirmation Hang up or press   00 through 59   For PM  Dial 1  For a daily alarm    Dial 1  tone 
212. n  DPT SLT                             Calling extension Called extension  Call Waiting setting  COS OHCA    OFF ON  assignment  0 1 2 3  Disable     BSS BSS BSS  Y W OHCA         Enable     BSS OHCA        BSS OHCA  gt  BSS                         OHCA  Off Hook Call Announcement  is activated when the called extension is KX T7235 or KX T7436   Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PT     8       The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call  a doorphone call is received  or  when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling     e Data Line Security  Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on by  an extension user      lt PT gt   e Call Waiting Tone Type Selection  For PT users  two types of call waiting tones are provided to prevent them from missing  the tone  A Call Waiting Tone type can be selected either by Station or System  Programming   e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 and KX T7235  you can set or cancel this  feature using the display operation    lt ISDN Telephone gt        This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     User Manual References  2 2 1 Initial Settings  4 3 7 Busy Station Signaling  BSS   4 3 35 Data Line Security  4 3 59 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA   4 3 60 Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA     Whisper  PT only   4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 D
213. n 0 4       Page GRP 0 8    Parallel 1 0    Pickup Dial 1 0    Pickup DL PG       R Timed Remind    Room Ready    St  Lock abcabc    STA  Prog Clear    SWR Print 1 0    Timed Reminder    WK COS code ext       Answer the page through a speaker   Answer the page through a telephone  in the same paging group    Page through the speaker    Page to all or a particular paging  group     Set whether a Single Line Telephone  connected in parallel will ring or not  when receiving a call     Set or cancel the feature  calling to a  pre set party by going off hook   Store the extension or phone number  to call a party by going off hook     Set the alarm ringing time for any  extension        Change the room status at a telephone  in a guest room    Prevent other people from making an  outgoing CO call from your  extension     Clear the features set at your  telephone     Print out or clear the system working  report        Set the alarm ringing time       Call using your privileges at another  extension               Only available for the Manager and the Operators      2 Only available for the operators and manager  After selecting this message  follow the steps in  the  Timed Reminder  Remote  feature in Section 4 4 Operator   Manager Service Features      3 After selecting this message  follow the steps as follows      KX T7436  steps of the  Timed Reminder  feature in  K X T7235 Display Features     System  Feature Access Menu  Features on the Eighth Display   in this section       
214. n 6      Clearing all message notifications left on your extension    PT and SLT with Message Lamp    Lo   o    your extension no  cbs    Lift the handset or Dial tone 4   when Dial 700  Dial your extension Hang up or press  press a message has been number  SP PHONE MONITOR   SP PHONE MONITOR  received at your   extension           e All message notifications are cleared          One of the dial tones  Refer to the  Tone List  in the Appendix  Section 6      Conditions       The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages  Except these  up to 128  phantom messages can be recorded  If you try to set the 129th message  you will hear a  reorder tone    e Callback Order  If multiple message notifications are left at your extension  callback is executed in the order  received     e Ifyou select a specific message to call back  callback is executed in the order received   starting with the one selected    e VPS Integration  If VPS Integration is employed  a VM extension informs an extension that a message is left  in his her mailbox by turning on the MESSAGE lamp   The extension user can listen to the message in the mailbox simply by pressing the red lit  MESSAGE lamp     User Manual 211    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Even if the MESSAGE buttons are neither provided nor assigned  dial tone 4     after going  off hook informs you if a message has been received at your extension  For single line  telephone users  a special ring tone can be provided
215. n calling an outside party     e The other party is placed on hold        158 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To leave the conference    PT and SLT    g  Gba    Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR     e The other two parties may continue their conversation   e If both other two parties are on outside lines  they will be disconnected        To terminate one party and talk to the other    INTERCOM    Press the CO or INTERCOM of Confirmation tone  the party to remain connected   optional     e Aconversation with the desired party is established and the other party is  disconnected    e This operation is available only when the extension user established the  conference call by using two different line access buttons    Not available when only one button is used         To talk to the third party while holding the original party    TRANSFER    Press TRANSFER  Confirmation tone Talk to the third party    optional       If both other two parties are extensions  the INTERCOM  indicator light flashes green moderately        User Manual 159    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           160    To talk to the original party while holding the third party    h    Dar E   d    Flash the hookswitch  Confirmation tone Talk to the original party    optional        To put both parties on hold    Press HOLD     e This feature is only available when at least one party is on an  outside line        Conditions  e Up to six conference calls are allowed simultan
216. n hold        Conditions    e Confirmation Tone  A confirmation tone is sent to the extension user who retrieved the held call  Eliminating  the tone is programmable     e  Call Park  cannot be retrieved by this feature     132 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 16 Call Hold    User Manual 133    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 19 Call Park    Allows you to place a held call into a system parking area  You can be released from the parked  call to perform other operations  The parked call can be retrieved from any extension  Up to  ten calls can be parked     Parking a call  PT and SLT    During a conversation     For PT    Y  T   G   een  For SLT    FA    For PT  Press TRANSFER  Confirmation tone Dial 52  Enter a parking zone  For SLT Flash the hookswitch  and dial tone number  0 through 9        TRANSFER  Co                  lt PT Display Example gt     Call  Parked at x    Parking zone number    Confirmation tone  0 through 9   and dial tone            If you hear a busy tone  it indicates the specified parking zone is  unavailable    lt PT Display Example gt     Park at x N A                e You can change the parking zone simply by entering the parking zone  number while hearing the busy tone        134 User Manual    Station Features and Operat
217. n where the call is held  After this  the held call can be retrieved from any other  extension  Refer to 6 1 3 Tone List for details about Tone Patterns    e Automatic Disconnection  If a outside call placed on hold is not retrieved in 30 minutes  it is automatically  disconnected       With outside calls  you can put multiple calls on exclusive hold  However  with intercom  calls  you can put only one call on exclusive hold     Programming Guide References   200  Hold Recall Time    130 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features Guide References  Hold Recall    User Manual References  4 3 16 Call Hold    User Manual 131    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 18 Call Hold Retrieve    Allows you to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold at other extensions     Retrieving an outside call on hold    PT and SLT    At the other extension        C  PON   5     3     outside line no       Enter the held   outside line number    01 08 for KX TD816    01 48 for KX TD1232        Confirmation  tone  optional     Lift the handset or press Dial 53   SP PHONE MONITOR     At the other extension      CO     Press CO whose indicator  is flashing red slowly       The CO indicator light  turns steady green        Retrieving an intercom call on hold    PT and SLT    At the other extension       amp  GCO    Lift the handset or press Dial 51  Dial the extension Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  number at which a call is  optional   placed o
218. n which is next to the desired feature message    To access the features while receiving a call  e g   ringing  being paged   press the INTERCOM  button first  Then follow the procedures on the following pages    The display sequence may be different depending on the system you are connected to     User Manual 329    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the First Display       Absent Message  Capability    Shows your message on  the calling party   s display     Cancel    Dial message  number  1 through 9         Executive Busy  Override Deny  Denies or allows other  people from joining  your conversation           Call Pickup   Outside Line    Picks up an  outside call for  another extension     On hook                                         Features SYS Speed  Call Log  CONT RING BGM       First Display    Absent MSG Off  Absent MSG On                       31 9    31 0                       Busy Ovrd Deny   C Pickup CO   C Pickup Deny  MENU PREV NEXT                                   31 0                                           Call Pickup  Deny   Denies or allows  other people   from picking up  your calls        See the next page                 ooo  ooo  oo    iz  FJ  Glia  Dial 1 or 0     Enter the parameters  ooo    if required  oo  o  ooo      1  Deny     0  Allow   On hook  On hook   g g   GL Gls    330    Dial 1 or 0     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Second Display       Call Pickup   Di
219. n your telephone  the dialing  sequence should be done within a certain period of time  Pickup Dial Waiting Time      default  1 s  after lifting the handset   This time can be changed by System Programming     If you use a ISDN telephone which are connected to the optional ISDN Line Unit  KX   TD284  can perform features in this section  However  there are some exceptions     92 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Applicable telephone    cece      Operation Step Box    In this section  operations for extension users are described using the following Operation Step  Box        Both PT and SLT users  Applicable telephone         can follow the operation      steps below    KX T7433 and KX     PT and SLT 7230   7235   7433   7436           KX T7230  KX T7235         T7436 users can execute i    Seopa ie a tee     not only the button      Operation but also the    display operation below           2   Wait for an answer BSS Wait for an answer   eeens   Operation steps    3 he    and talk  sq  BZ  S3  and talk  O ie  Press BSS  S1        Note    e Ifyour telephone is not noted in the operating step box  ex   only  PT  is noted   this means  your telephone does not have the ability to execute that feature    e Ifyour telephone has the ability to perform several operations for one feature  you can select  the method according to your needs       In this manual  the default feature numbers are used to describe each operation and  illustration  Use the
220. nces    2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment    2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433   KX T7436 only     3 2 2  001  System Speed Dialing Number Set  4 3 62 One Touch Dialing  PT only    4 3 79 Station Speed Dialing   4 3 80 System Speed Dialing    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 78 Station Program Clear    Allows you to reset the following station features to the default settings         a  Absent Message Capability  The message set on your  extension      b  Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On            c  Background Music that has been turned on      d  Call Forwarding           e  Call Log  Incoming        Call Pickup Deny    g  Call Waiting    h  Data Line Security    Gi  Do Not Disturb  DND                     j  Executive Busy Override Deny   k  Log In Log Out           1  Message Waiting  All messages that have been left on  your extension by other extension users      m  Off Hook Call Announcement  OHCA             n  Paging Deny         o   Paralleled Telephone Connection         p  Pickup Dialing  Hot Line       The stored telephone  number will be removed         q  Timed Reminder   r  Whisper OHCA                    PT only    User Manual 259    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Clearing the current feature settings    Any Telephone    260    f    C     amp  ECE EBS    Lift the handset or press Dial 790  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone SP 
221. ncluded as the first digit of the emergency  no     Programming Guide References   334  Emergency Dial Number Set    182 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 42 Executive Busy Override     Extension    You can interrupt an existing extension call  either between two inside parties or between an  outside party and an inside party  by dialing  2   This establishes a 3 party conference call     7230   7235   7433   7436    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call     Mp  Over   de  A three party conference is   S2  now established     Press Over  S2   Confirmation tone   optional     Any Telephone    If you hear a busy tone after making an intercom call        Mp  rie A three party conference    2   is now established        Confirmation tone  optional        To leave the conference    Any Telephone    cls The other two parties  continue their conversation        Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        To terminate one party and talk to the other    fo   CO  INTERCOM al  A or O0  A    Press the CO or INTERCOM Confirmation tone  optional   of the party to remain connected        Conditions    e Class of Service  Class of Service programming determines the extension that can perform this feature        This feature does not work when  Data Line Security  or  Executive Busy Override Deny   is set at either or both of the other parties     User Manual 183    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Executive Busy Override De
222. nds free Answerback  PT only   4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 245    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 70 Phantom Extension    Allows you to route calls to a phantom extension  The call arrives at the extension who has the  corresponding Phantom button  A flexible CO button can be assigned as the Phantom button   The lighting patterns of Phantom button and status are as follows     Off   Idle  Red   You are calling a phantom extension   Flashing green rapidly   Incoming call    To call a phantom extension    While the Phantom button indicator light is off      Phantom  r  AL  or phantom extension no     Press Phantom  flexible button   Dial the phantom extension number        e You may dial the phantom extension number instead      The Phantom indicator light turns red  steady      Any Telephone       E          phantom extension no        Lift the handset Dial the phantom extension number   or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        246 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To transfer a call to a phantom extension  Screened Call Transfer     During a conversation     l M    pD    i  TRANSFER 1 a rf LL      Press Phantom Ringback tone    Press TRANSFER   Confirmation Dial tone  flexible button    tone    e You may dial the phantom extension       The other party is placed on  number instead     consultation hold 
223. ng the programming mode  your extension is treated as a busy extension      Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time        The User Programming Password is not shown on the display for security reason  The  password can be changed by System Programming     Programming Guide References   120  User Password    In this section  programs  001  through  004  are explained  Please consult with your dealer  when you need to change the following programs     e  005  Flexible CO Button Assignment       006  Operator   Manager Extension Assignment       007  DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment      008  Absent Messages      009  Quick Dial Number Set       012  ISDN Extension Number Set       013  ISDN Extension Name Set        014  VM Name Set    User Manual 71    User Programming          3 1 2 Programming Methods    Advancing to the next stage  When  USR PGM NO       is displayed  you can select one of the following   e To go to program  000   press the NEXT button   e To go to another program  enter the 3 digit program address     Rotation of jack number  Each jack of the Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a digital proprietary  telephone and a single line device with different extension numbers  eXtra Device Port  XDP  function   To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack  The first  part of jack one is 01 1  The second part of jack one is 01 2  The first part of jack two is 02 1  an
224. nlocks the door  Calls the doorphone  MENU PREV  Dial 1 or 0   Boo f    oo Background See the next page   Oo  gt   fry Dial door opener Music     External  number   operator manager only     1  Set  On  ooo Refer to the    0  Cancel  Off  pgg corresponding feature    oo      Oo in Section 4 4    Operator   Manager    Service Features                  On hook    1 through 4   if connected N J    to KX TD816  y   1 through 8   if connected External Modem  GL to KX TD1232 Control  Sends the AT Comand  On hook  to an external modem        Dial doorphone    g number   gba T    ooo Enter AT Command    fry number  1 through 5    ooo  200  pa    1 through 4   if connected dim  to KX TD816      1 through 8   if connected  to KX TD1232    On hook     UW    332 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Fourth Display            LCS    Password Set   Sets or cancels the  password for the    Live Call Screening  feature                                        Call Log Lock   Incoming    Denies or allows  other people from  seeing your       incoming call log           Enter password Enter lock code     000 through 999      000 000    ooo 000     twice  to set   twice  to deny     once  to cancel   once  to allow  On hook  On hook     User Manual    a     Call Log   Incoming    Selects whether  the 31th call is  disregarded or  overwrites the  oldest call            000 through 999      QS                Co MENU PREV NEXT                               
225. nsion when your extension is busy or you do not  answer the call within a pre determined time     Setting  7235   7436    FWD BSY NA  ext     FWD DND  NEXT  Cl     Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press NEXT  S3   Press FWD BSY NA  F1    press SP PHONE              extension no  v  iN        Enter the destination Confirmation tone Hang up or press  extension number  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   FWD  B NA  Ext xxxx                           extension number where  the call is to be forwarded      The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly        120 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT        wa lace ee     FWD DND  For PT    PAI ners    Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  Enter the destination Confirmation  or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  extension number  tone and  SP PHONE MONITOR  dial tone          e You may press the flexible button assigned as  the FWD DND button instead     g  lt PT Display Example gt   Ghd FWD  B NA  Ext xxxx                        extension number where  SP PHONE MONITOR  the call is to be forwarded      The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly     Hang up or press       Conditions       The number of rings before a call is forwarded can be changed for each extension  except  ISDN extensions   T1 extensions  with program   619  Extension Call Forwarding     No  Answer Time   If   619  Extension Call Forwarding     No Answer Time  is not set   program   202  Call Forwarding     No Answer Time
226. nt Code Entry 49 Account code      99    Automatic Callback Busy  Camp On  cancel 46   Background Music  BGM      External on off 35   Call Forwarding     set cancel 710 2 6 0   Call Forwarding     Follow Me set cancel 710 7 8   Call Hold 50   Call Hold  Retrieve outside call 53 01 08  for KX TD816   01 48  for KX TD 1232    Call Hold  Retrieve intercom call 51 extension no    Call Log Incoming set cancel 56 1 0   Call Log Lock Incoming lock 57 000 999 twice   Call Log Lock Incoming Unlock 57 000 999  same lock code    Call Park Call Park Retrieve 52 0 9   Call Pickup  Directed 41 EXTN   extension no     Call Pickup  Group 40   Call Pickup  Outside Line 4    Call Pickup Deny set cancel 720 1 0   Call Waiting set cancel 731 1 0   CTI Code Entry     CTI code      99    Data Line Security set cancel 730 1 0   Do Not Disturb  DND  set cancel 710 1 0          User Manual    375    APPENDIX          Flexible Feature Numbers                                                                                                 Feature Default Additional Digits  Doorphone Call calling   door open 31 55  1 4  for KX TD816   1 8  for KX TD1232   Electronic Station Lockout set 77 000 999 twice  Electronic Station Lockout cancel 77 000 999  Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel 733 1 0  External Feature Access 6  External Modem Control 791 1 5  Hotel Application     Room Status 736  Live Call Screening  LCS  Password set 799 000 999 twice  Live Call Screening  LCS  Password cancel 799 000 999 
227. ntercom or outside  or access a system feature with the touch of a  button  This is done by storing an extension number  telephone number or feature number  up  to 16 digits  in a One Touch Dialing button     Dialing     CO   One Touch     C1     Lift the handset or press Press CO  if required  Press One Touch Dialing  SP PHONE MONITOR   Flexible button         Conditions     One Touch Dialing button can be programmed by Station  User or System Programming        Ifyou store the telephone number of an outside party  a line access code  9  or 81 through  88  must be stored as the leading digit    e You may press a CO button to select a desired outside line directly before pressing the One   Touch Dialing button     e Combination dialing  Speed Dialing  One Touch Dialing  manual dialing  Last Number Redial and Saved  Number Redial can be used in a combination        Storing more than 17 digits number  It is possible to store a number consisting of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it  in two One Touch Dialing buttons  In this case  an outside line access code should be stored  in the first button     e Full One Touch Dialing  If  Full One Touch Dialing  is enabled by Station Programming  you can press the One   Touch Dialing button directly without going off hook     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 48 Full One Touch Dialing  PT only     User Manual 229    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 63 Operator Call    Allows yo
228. ny  It is possible for extension users  if allowed by Class of Service Programming  to prevent  this feature from being executed by another extension user     e Confirmation tone  When a 2 party call is changed to a 3 party call and vice versa  a confirmation tone is sent  to all three parties  This tone can be eliminated by System Programming       Terminate one party and talk to the other  This feature can be performed only during conference with an outside party and inside    party     Programming Guide References   505  Executive Busy Override   601  Class of Service   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  4 3 32 Conference  4 3 35 Data Line Security  4 3 44 Executive Busy Override Deny    184 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 43 Executive Busy Override     Outside Line  PT only     Allow you to connect to an existing outside call or add a third party to your existing  conversation     Setting    hy  pdr   CO  alr A three party conference  EE       is now established        Lift the handset or press Press the red lit CO Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  corresponding to the  optional   desired caller        To leave the conference    5 The other two parties  69 continue their conversation           Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        To terminate one party and talk to the other    fr    CO  INTERCOM alt  OO  or O07  wy     Press CO or INTERCOM Confirmation tone  of the party to remain connected   optional
229. o 16 digits  including a line access code  can be programmed   e Valid digits are  0 through 9   x   PAUSE  pausing time  can be stored by dialing x x     e Class of Service  Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can perform this feature     e Outside to Outside Line Call  If an incoming outside call is forwarded to an outside line  the  Outside to Outside Line    Call Duration Time  is applied to the call and the line will be disconnected when it expires   default  10 min      Programming Guide References   206  Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time   504  Call Forwarding to Outside Line   601  Class of Service    User Manual 123    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 14 Call Forwarding     Follow Me    You can set the  Call Forwarding  feature from the destination extension  This is useful if you  forget to set  Call Forwarding     All Calls  before you leave your desk     Setting  7235   7436    At the destination extension     FWD From  ext   FWD DND  NEXT  A    Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press NEXT  S3   Press FWD From  F3    press SP PHONE        fr    7 Bs         i  your extension no  d       Dial your extension Confirmation tone Hang up or press  number  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt        FWD  From  EXtXXXX       es your extension number      The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly at your  extension        124 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT        PT and SLT 
230. o lift or set down the display         To lift the display  1 Press the LCD ADJ button   2 Lift up the display         To set down the display  1 Press the LCD ADJ button     2 Press down the display  LCD ADJ button       18 User Manual    DPT Overview                     KX T7436  Display  Liquid Crystal Display   i With 24 character 6 line readout   Function Buttons Shows the date  time  dialed number or name    F1 through F5  call duration time  etc  In Programming mode   it shows the programming messages    Flexible CO Buttons Soft Buttons   Outside lines 01 through 24   S1 through S3   PROGRAM Button Function Buttons    F6 through F10   FWD DND Button  CONF Button  INTERCOM Button    J  J SHIFT Button    PAUSE Button    MESSAGE Button  AUTO DIAL STORE Button  Wy AUTO ANSWER MUTE Button  REDIAL Button IS  FLASH RCL Button  HOLD Button  Jog Dial  SP PHONE Button    Microphone    To lift or set down the display         To lift the display  1 Press the LCD ADJ button     2 Lift up the display         To set down the display  1 Press the LCD ADJ button     2 Press down the display  EDAD NOON       User Manual 19    DPT Overview                  KX T7220  Flexible CO Buttons  MESSAGE Button  Outside lines 01 through 24   FWD DND Button  CONF Button  INTERCOM Button    RINGER Volume Selector    Used to adjust the ringer volume     EDIAL Button TRANSFER Button  LASH Button i PROGRAM Button  OLD Button VOLUME Control Button  icrophone AUTO DIAL STORE Button   SP PHONE Button AUTO
231. on  CLIR     When making an outside call through an ISDN line  you can prevent the other party from  seeing your identification number  You can change the setting at any time for a particular call   temporarily or continuously    This is one of the ISDN supplementary service     To restrict the presentation of your number to the other party    Any Telephone    hj    se ie g  SA Ls ILe  L2   giaa   Lift the handset or press Dial 592  Confirmation tone Hang up or press    SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt   CLIR On                      To present your number to the other party    Any Telephone    Q ipa g   t s Gba   Lift the handset or press Dial 590  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        CLIR Off                   154 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           To temporarily change the setting at any time for a particular call    Any Telephone    h  C pa  o Bem         Lift the handset or press Dial 591  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone    ia  CO     om For PT hy z          pa  L9    mose A D 2 cb    For PT  Press CO assigned Dial tone Dial the phone number  Hang up or press    as Loop CO   SP PHONE MONITOR   Group CO   Single CO     For any telephone  Dial the line access    p  code  9 or 81 through 88   The display shows the    phone number     e The selected CO indicator light turns green        Conditions  
232. on Programming          For KX T7431 and KX T7433 users    To store a number        Be sure tha    7431   7433    Dial X X     t you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9            AUTO DIAL          station speed dial no  desired number          STORE    Enter a station speed dial Enter the desired number Press STORE   number  0 through 9    extension number   phone number  etc         The STORE indicator lights       The STORE indicator light turns off    The display shows the initial    The display shows the current status  programming mode      If nothing is stored      Not Stored  is displayed       lt PT Display Example gt     9 123 4567        Outside number  123 4567   is now programmed         CLR NI    EXT         Up to 16 digits  consisting of 0 through 9        FLASH  FLASH RCL  PAUSE   INTERCOM      or       secret  and CONF      hyphen   can be stored     To store the telephone number of an outside party  the line access code  9 or 81    through 8    8  must be stored as the leading digit       To erase the entry  press the CLR  S2  button or TRANSFER button         CLR      S2  button  for KX T7433 users        TRANSFER button  for KX T7431 users    To store a name  press the NEXT  S3  button  KX T7433  or MODE button  KX     T7431  and go to step 4 in  To store a name  as described in the following procedure            To exit the    User Manual    Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     61    Station Programmin
233. on Speed Dialing  can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits    lt PT gt   e One Touch Dialing  A PT user may make a call with One Touch Dialing button  instead of Station Speed  Dialing      With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation   e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 and KX T7235  you can store not only  phone numbers but names as well     User Manual 261    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt SLT gt        The SLT may be replaced with a PT temporarily to store one touch dialing into memory   The Function Buttons  F1 through F10  correspond to speed dial numbers as follows     Fl    0 F6     5  F2    1 F7   6  F3     2 F8    7  F4    3 F9     8  F5     4 F10    9    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment    2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  KX T7235 KX T743 1 KX T7433   KX T7436 only     4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    262 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 80 System Speed Dialing    Allows you to make a call using speed dial numbers programmed previously  This system  supports five hundred speed dial numbers which are available to all extension users     Any Telephone     AUTO DIAL    For PT    Gy STORE ddial  system speed dial no   ISDN telephone                Lift the handset or press For PT  Press 
234. one 3    Confirmation Tone 4    Dial Tone 1    Dial Tone 2    Dial Tone 3    Dial Tone 4    Busy Tone    Reorder Tone    Ringback Tone 1    Ringback Tone 2    Do Not Disturb  DND   Tone    Outside to Outside Line  Call Limit Warning Tone    User Manual          379    APPENDIX           lt TONE gt     a 1535       __________ gt     Call Waiting Tone 1    Call Waiting Tone 2   outside line     Call Waiting Tone 2   intercom     Hold Recall     lt RING TONE gt     Outside Calls    Outside Call Hold Recall       Intercom Calls    Intercom Hold Recall       Doorphone Calls    Timed Reminder       Callback Ringing   Camp on Recall        380 User Manual    APPENDIX          6 1 4 Troubleshooting    If a power failure should occur       Your System enables conversations between specific outside lines and extensions  Power  Failure Transfer   and supports system data backup     Power Failure Transfer    Specific extensions are automatically connected straight to specific outside lines  This  provides outside line conversations between the pre assigned extensions and analog outside  lines      lt KX TD816 gt   Outside line 01 is connected to extension jack number 01   Outside line 02 is connected to extension jack number 02   Outside line 05 is connected to extension jack number 09   Outside line 06 is connected to extension jack number 10      lt KX TD1232 gt   Outside line 01 is connected to extension jack number 01   Outside line 02 is connected to extension jack number 02   Outsi
235. onference call while connected to an existing call     Setting    During a conversation with an outside party  to allow another  extension to join the conversation      at your extension  at the other extension y  n    co   CO  pd   m DO a  Press the corresponding Press the flashing CO Confirmation tone  co  within five seconds   optional   e The corresponding CO indicator e A three party conference is now  light flashes green rapidly  established        To leave the conference    v  Gla  Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     e The other two parties may continue  their conversation        To terminate one party and talk to the other    INTERCOM  or    Press CO or INTERCOM of the desired party        252       User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions     The CO button pressed to join the conversation needs to be assigned as a Single CO  S CO   button     e After the user presses the CO button  the CO indicator light of the other extension flashes  rapidly for only 5 seconds  Pressing the CO button again gives you an additional 5 seconds        This feature overrides  Data Line Security  and  Executive Busy Override Deny      e When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa  a confirmation tone  is sent to all three parties  Eliminating the tone is programmable     Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 32 Conference  4 3 35 Data
236. ontrast level 3                 When using the headset    The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a proprietary  telephone  PT   When you use the headset  optional   you should switch the selection mode  first  Selection is explained in the  Handset   Headset Selection  in Station selection mode first   Selection is explained in the  Handset   Headset Selection  in Station Programming     To change to the headset mode  Press   PROGRAM   9   9   9   2   STORE   PROGRAM      Changing the ringing tone of a CO button   Intercom calls    There are eight ringer frequencies available for each CO  Group CO  Loop CO  Single CO   button and INTERCOM button  If you wish to change them  refer to  Ringing Tone Selection  for CO Buttons  or  Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls  in Station Programming     Volume Control     Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker  Allows you to adjust the following volumes as necessary       Handset Receiver volume  level 1 through 3       Headset volume  level 1 through 3       Ringer volume  level 0 through 3       Speaker volume  level   through 12     User Manual 37    DPT Overview          If your digital proprietary telephone is provided with a display  display DPT   the volume level  is indicated on the display by the number of asterisks  For ringer volume adjustment  three  levels  OFF LOW HIGH  are available with the KX T7220 and KX T7250     To adjust the handset receiver volume    Display PT       oy  ON
237. or INTERCOM button before the destination party answers        If you want to join the conversation after transferring the call or while hold recall tone  is sent  press the corresponding CO button  A conference call is established      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Programming Guide References   206  Outside to Outside Line Call Duration Time   503  Call Transfer to Outside Line   601  Class of Service    Features Guide References  Hold Recall    146 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 27 Call Waiting    During a call  a Call Waiting tone informs you that there is another call waiting for you  You  can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold   PT users can choose one of three Call Waiting modes     Setting    ie Call Waiting BSS fs it    2  Call Waiting OHCA   3    1     2   fp    3  Call Waiting W OHCA  3  pa  3   J    Lift the handset or press 1  Dial 7311  Confirmation tone  SP PHONE MONITOR  2  Dial 7312  and dial tone  3  Dial 7313     i  v          g  lt PT Display Example gt   GWs BSS    Call Wait                Hang up or press ar    SP PHONE MONITOR  OHCA    Ca Wait                         W OHCA    Call Wait              amp  MIB     Lift the handset  Dial 7311  Confirmation tone  and dial tone       Canceling    PT and SLT    ro  7 lsin o  D  LEN Gla  Lift the handset or press Dial 7310  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  and di
238. or press  playback is finished tone SP PHONE MONITOR        The STORE indicator light turns off        User Manual 295    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Playing back a message  7235   7436     D  co  Features ENE c  OGM Playback  71 4     A  Cc    Press Features  Rotate Jog Dial or press NEXT Press OGM Playback   until the following is displayed       AUTO DIAL  B    STORE    Enter OGM number Confirmation tone Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone   1 through 4   playback is finished        The STORE indicator light turns off      lt PT Display Example gt              OGM 1 Play 28       E Time counter  seconds        The STORE indicator lights      The message is played back and the counter starts        296 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Playing back a message        gt  OGM Play 1 4    SELECT MODE  m Co    Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until  OGM Press SELECT    Feature Access  is Play  is displayed   displayed        1 AUTO DIAL   E    STORE    Enter OGM number Confirmation tone Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone   1 through 4   playback is finished        The STORE indicator light turns off      lt PT Display Example gt           OGM 1 Play 28          IE  Time counter  seconds     e The STORE indicator lights   e The message is played back and the counter starts        User Manual 297    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Playing back a message    A  co    Press SHIFT until Press FEAT 
239. ot Disturb                   Canceling    7235   7436    FWD DND Cancel    FWD DND d i     o  Gla    Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press FWD DND Cancel  F1   Confirmation tone Hang up or press  press SP PHONE  and dial tone SP PHONE      lt PT Display Example gt   FWD DND Cancel                   User Manual 171    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Setting   Canceling  PT and SLT    FWD DND    h  To set ne    For PT    a      a fi  a     1   o  For PT  SLT  o  To cancel J     Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  To set  Dial 1  Confirmation tone  or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  To cancel  Dial 0  and dial tone  SP PHONE MONITOR           e When setting  the FWD DND indicator lights   im  lt PT Display Example gt     y  Ga Do Not Disturb    e When canceling  the FWD DND indicator light turns off   Hang up or press f  SP PHONE MONITOR   lt PT Display Example gt   FWD DND Cancel                               Conditions     DND also works for an incoming call from a doorphone     DND does not work for the following calls         Hold Recall      Timed Reminder Alarm Tone  e Do Not Disturb Override  An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to  override DND in their Class of Service    lt PT gt   e An extension user may have only one type of Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb feature  in effect at any time  If one of Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb feature is assigned   another does not function but the assignment itself i
240. phantom extension no    9  O          Press Two Way Transfer Dial the extension number  the phantom extension number or   flexible button   press DSS  flexible button  where you left a message notification     e The Two Way Transfer indicator light turns red        Stopping recording     Two Way  Tran     Press Two Way Transfer flexible button        The Two Way Transfer indicator light turns off        Conditions    e A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two Way Record button or a Two Way  Transfer button        Pressing the Two Way Record button sends an alarm tone  if no idle voice mail port exists     e Pressing the Two Way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm  tone  if no idle voice mail port exists       When you record Two way telephone conversations  you should inform the other party that  the conversation is being recorded    e Two Way Recording into Phantom mailbox   Allows you to record a conversation into the Phantom mailbox by entering the phantom  extension number after pressing the Two way Transfer button  The Phantom Message  Waiting indicator light turns on  It will turn off after one of the phantom extension users  listens to the recorded conversation     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment    User Manual 273    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 87 Uniform Call Distribution  UCD     Allows incoming calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific group of extensions called an  UCD
241. r the warning tone        168 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Re try    From Outside Telephone    It is possible  by System Programming  to dial a different number during a conversation  with an outside party or while hearing a ringback  reorder  or busy tone     Press X  Dial the desired number     e You hear a dial tone    e If you dial   X  while hearing a DISA outgoing message   dial tone  or after the DISA outgoing message  the call  will be disconnected     e You must dial a line access code  9 or 81 through 88   when calling an outside party        Conditions    Calling an extension       e You can choose Non Security or All Security mode  In All Security mode  the caller  must enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make intercom calls       Ifthe DISA call is not answered within a specified period of time  the system redirects  it to the pre determined IRNA destination   If IRNA destination is not programmed  the DISA call continues to ring at the first  destination extension     Calling an outgoing outside line       e You can choose Non Security  Outside Line Security or All Security mode  In Outside  Line Security mode  the caller must enter a pre assigned DISA user code to make  outside calls  In All Security mode  the caller must enter a pre assigned DISA user code  to make both outside and intercom calls     General       Ifthe caller does not dial any digits during and after the playback of DISA outgoing  message  the system wil
242. rded to another extension when you      Busy No Answer  do not answer or when your extension is busy    Call Forwarding All incoming calls are forwarded to an outside line                 Call Forwarding Allows you to set the  Call Forwarding     All Calls  feature      Follow Me from another extension    Note  You can also set Voice Mail as the forwarding destination  Refer to 4 3 88 Voice Mail  Integration    Conditions       To cancel Call Forwarding features  refer to 4 3 15 Call Forwarding     CANCEL      Forwarded call is not forwarded furthermore    Call Forwarding can only be extended to one target telephone  For example  extension A is  forwarded to extension B  and extension B is forwarded to extension C  A call to extension    A is forwarded to extension B  but the call would not be forwarded to extension C   Consequently  extension B is treated as the final destination of Call Forwarding                    Ext A  oe  Ext B     eee  gt    Ext  x  No  xt C                Setting a new  Call Forwarding  function  All Calls  Busy  Busy No Answer  etc   cancels                any other  Call Forwarding  functions     e Floating Station    A floating station such as a DISA  Direct Inward System Access   MODEM or external    pager cannot be programmed as a forwarding destination     User Manual       Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              Two extensions can set each other as the destination extension  In this case  an intercom call  to the other party while
243. re engaged in a call using the handset  you  hear a confirmation tone and then the caller s voice through the built in speaker of your PT     HOLD c2    Press HOLD  Talk        The current call is placed on hold      The INTERCOM indicator light flashes green slowly        User Manual 221    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions      BSS  OHCA   Whisper OHCA  If an extension user dials  1  while hearing a busy tone  BSS or OHCA or Whisper OHCA  will be activated at the called extension   This is determined by the following conditions                       Calling extension Called extension  Call Waiting setting  CO EOKA OFF ON  assignment  0 1 2 3  Disable     BSS BSS BSS  P W OHCA     Enable     BSS OHCA     sBSS _ OHCA_  BSS                              OHCA  Off Hook Call Announcement  is activated when the called extension is KX T7235 or KX T7436    2 Whisper OHCA is activated when both calling and called extensions are using one of the KX T7400 series PT        If Do Not Disturb  DND   feature is set at the called extension  you hear DND tone  In this  case  to execute OHCA  you must first activate  Do Not Disturb  DND  Override  feature  before OHCA is available     e Call Waiting  This feature is only effective if the called extension has set  Call Waiting  feature  If not   you will hear a reorder tone after dialing 1      lt PT gt     e This feature works when the other extension is in off hook status and the INTERCOM  button is idle lit in gre
244. re is available only for KX T7436 and KX   T7235     Conference  Unattended When you are in a conference with two outside parties  you can  leave the conference and allow the other two parties to continue the conversation  You can also  return to the conference     Data Line Security prohibits various tones  such as call waiting tone or hold recall tone  from  sounding at the extension in the data communication mode  It also blocks overriding by other  extensions  such as Executive Busy Override     Doorphone and Door Opener      Option  enables the conversation between you and a  visitor at door  You can also unlock the door a few seconds from your phone     Executive Busy Override allows you to enter into an existing conversation at an extension   outside line     Full One Touch Dialing allows you to have easy access to a desired party or system feature  by pressing just one button    Message Waiting allows you to leave a message notification for another extension  The  message waiting lamp  MESSAGE indicator  gives a visual indication that a message  notification has been received  Even if the Message button is not provided or assigned  a  special tone after going off hook indicates that a message notification has been received     Paralleled Telephone Connection allows you to connect your DPT in parallel with a SLT   Each telephone can have the same extension number so that you can use either telephone  If  the eXtra Device Port  XDP  feature is available through System P
245. rected    Picks up a specified    extension s call        Dial the ringing  extension   s number     User Manual          Call Pickup     Call Park  Group Places a call on  hold in a parking    Picks up a call  within an    area or retrieves it        extension group        Call Waiting Dial parking  zone number   Sets or cancels the  0 through 9     Call Waiting feature    Call Waiting  OHCA ooo    or Whisper OHCA   dim    Dial 1 through 3 or 0          1  to set Call Waiting     2  to set OHCA     3  to set Whisper OHCA    0  to cancel  Off     On hook        F     Gw                                  MENU    PREV NEXT                         Second Display    C Pickup Direct   gt ext   C Pickup Group    C Waiting   Call Park   Callback  MENU       gt 0 3     30 9   Busy Cancel  PREV NEXT                                  Automaic    Callback Busy     Cancel    Cancels the setting  which reserves a    busy line           On hook     qe                                        l See the next page          331    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Features on the Third Display             MENU PREV NEXT H                                        Data Line Security      Refuses or accepts an Third Display   indication tone  e g    z  call waiting tone  Data Line On Of                         Door Open                Doorphone Call                                                                            Extrn BGM On Off  Door Opener Doorphone Call Extrn MODEM CTRL  U
246. res and Operation  DPT SLT           e  lt When KX TD161 is installed gt   Doorphone   and Doorphone 2 cannot establish conversations simultaneously  When one  is in use  an extension user cannot have a conversation with the other  This is the same for  Doorphone 3 and Doorphone 4  Doorphone 5 and Doorphone 6  and Doorphone 7 and  Doorphone 8    lt For example gt   During a doorphone call between extension A and doorphone 1      When calling doorphone 2 from extension B       The extension B receives a busy tone       The extension B cannot unlock a door by pressing  5       When pressing the doorphone 2 button       A doorphone call occurs       The extension can answer the doorphone call  but cannot have a conversation       The extension can unlock a door by pressing  5      e Ifyou dial  5  again while the door is open  the door will stay open for another five seconds      An access tone can be programmed not to be sent to the monitored doorphone before  monitoring starts   e Doorphone Call Destination  It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive doorphone calls during day and  night mode   e What if a doorphone call is not answered   If not answered within 30 seconds  the call stops ringing and is canceled  You can change  from 30 seconds to 15 seconds by System Programming   e Unlocking the door opener  During a doorphone call  any extension user can unlock the door opener  user supplied   from their extensions by dialing  5  to let the visitor in   e You
247. rogrammed to match the operation of your Voice Processing System     e Voice Mail Transfer to Phantom Mailbox   Allows you to transfer received outside calls to the Phantom Mailbox by entering the  phantom extension number after pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button  The Phantom  Message Waiting indicator light turns on  It will turn off after one of the phantom extension  users listens to the stored message     Programming Guide References     106  Station Hunting Type    113  VM Status DTMF Set    114  VM Command DTMF Set   602  Extension Group Assignment   609  Voice Mail Access Codes    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 88 Voice Mail Integration    User Manual 279    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 90 Walking COS    Allows you to use your calling privileges  Class of Service  at another extension  You may  override restrictions which may be set at the extension     Making a call    Any Telephone    At another extension        S    ro      4  7     Walking COS password   extension no        Lift the handset Dial 47   or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     Confirmation Dial the phone  tone and number   dial tone    e You must dial a line access    code  9 or 81 through 88   or press the CO button     Conditions       Enter the Walking COS Dial your extension  password  4 through 7 number   digits       lt PT Display Example gt     Set COS of EXXXX    L your extension
248. rogramming  each  telephone can be connected to the same extension port but have different extension numbers  so that they can act as completely different extensions     System Feature Access Menu allows you to access various features easily by following the  display on the LCD and pressing corresponding buttons  This feature is available only for the  KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 and KX T7235    VPS Integration      Option  enables forwarding any incoming call to Voice Mail  Recording  or Playing back the message s  1s also available  To use Voice Mail services  installing a Voice  Processing System  VPS  is required     Terms used in the Descriptions   Feature Numbers  A feature number is an access code for various functions when programming or executing  features using proprietary or single line telephones connected to the system  You can access  available features by dialing the corresponding feature number  and additional number  if  required    There are two types of feature numbers as follows    e Flexible feature number   e Fixed feature number  While fixed feature numbers cannot be changed  flexible feature numbers can be changed   Refer to the Programming Guide for details  In this manual  the default numbers are used to    User Manual 7    Introduction          describe each operation and illustration  Use the new programmed number if you have changed  a flexible feature number  The lists of fixed numbers and default flexible feature numbers are  shown in the Appen
249. rogramming mode             To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     User Manual 359    DSS Console Features          5 2 4 One Touch Access Assignment for System Features  You can assign the desired feature number to a DSS or PF button         Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM   9   9    PT and DSS Console     DSS Console   Paired telephone   Paired telephone   Paired telephone      DSS   PF  AUTO DIAL  Dor CA feature no  E     STORE    Press the desired Enter the desired Press STORE   DSSor PFbutton  feature number      lt PT Display Example gt  The STORE indicator lights        The display shows the initial  programming mode   CLR       e Up to 16 digits can be stored       For example  if you wish to gain access to the  Paging All   feature  enter the feature number 330       To erase an incorrect entry  press the CLR  S2  button or the  TRANSFER  CLEAR  button    The TRANSFER button becomes the CLEAR button in the  Station Programming mode             To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset     360 User Manual    DSS Console Features          5 3 DSS Console Features    5 3 1 Direct Station Dialing    An extension can be called and accessed  simply by pressing a DSS button  The BLF shows if  the extension is busy     PT and DSS Console     Paired telephone   DSS Console     e  088     Q    Lift the handset or press Press the desired DSS button   SP PHONE MONITOR     
250. roup  Through  programming  outside lines can be divided into eight line groups     Any Telephone     CO   LL  For PT C a    ide li phone no      v   outside line  For any a G    3   group no  telephone  Lift the handset For PT Press CO assigned Dial tone Dial the Talk  Hang up or press  or press as Group CO  phone number  SP PHONE   SP PHONE MONITOR  For any telephone Dial 8 and the MONITOR    outside line group number     rtarough 3      The display shows the phone number     e The selected CO indicator light turns green        Conditions  e You may press the G CO button directly without first going off hook     User Manual 233    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 65 Paging    SUMMARY    Allows you to make a voice announcement to several people at the same time  Your message  is announced over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones  PT  and or external speakers   External Pagers   The paged person can answer your page from a nearby telephone  There are  three types of paging as shown below  You can select the appropriate type according to your  needs        Type Description       Paging     All Paging through both the built in speakers of PTs and  external pagers        Paging through all of the external pagers simultaneously        Paging     External  Paging to a specific external pager        Paging to all paging groups simultaneously        Paging     Group Paging to a particular group of extensions through the built   in speakers of PTs    
251. s    The default is  Parallel Off  No ring      The PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is set to ring   When receiving a call       If SLT ringing is enabled  then both the PT and the SLT will ring except when the PT is  in  Hands free Answerback  mode or Voice Calling mode with the  Alternate Calling      Ring Voice  feature       If SLT ringing is disabled  then the PT rings but the SLT does not  However  the SLT can  answer the call    When the SLT is in use  the display and the indicators of the PT will work in the same way  as if the PT is in use    In the DPT   SLT combination  if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is  on a call  the call is switched to the former    If you go off hook while your paralleled telephone is in use  the call will switch over to your  telephone  and vice versa    The  XDP   feature is available          XDP  eXtra Device Port  expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension port to contain two  telephones  For more details  please consult with your dealer     244    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt PT gt   e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436  or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation    lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Feature Guide References  EXtra Device Port  XDP     User Manual References  4 3 3 Alternate Calling     Ring   Voice  4 3 50 Ha
252. s can be stored and redialed  excluding a line access code   e  X         PAUSE   and  INTERCOM   for secret dialing  are counted as one digit         SAVE button  A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button by Station  User or System  Programming     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment    User Manual 257    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 77    Secret Dialing  PT only     Allows you to conceal all or part s  of a  System Speed Dialing  or  One Touch Dialing   number assigned to a flexible button on your PT and DSS console which normally appears on  the display  Additionally  KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 and KX T7235 Model  Telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for  Station Speed Dialing  numbers     When storing the phone number     INTERCOM    Press INTERCOM before and after the part you wish to conceal     258     lt PT Display Example gt        9 1  123          123  is not shown on the display when you dial                 Conditions       The secret code      or      pressing the INTERCOM button   are counted as one digit   e You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number        Ifthe phone number  9 1  123  456 7890  has been stored  the display shows the following  when the call is made         ll 5 5 ea  a 7  95 S10      The concealed part will be printed out by Station Message Detail Recording  SMDR               Programming Guide References     001  System Speed Dialing Number Set    User Manual Refere
253. s preserved for future use  The  extension user can choose either one by pressing the FWD DND button while on hook   In this case  pressing the button changes the settings as follows     ay     gt  FWD Sil       The lighting patterns of the FWD DND button are as follows     Off   Both functions are canceled  Red on   DND mode     This setting can be changed  Red flash   FWD mode by System Programming        A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing a flashing button which shows  the arrival of the call     172 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT            lt 7250 gt     e A flexible button on the KX T7250  no FWD DND button provided  can be assigned as  the FWD DND button      lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 8 Call Forwarding     SUMMARY  4 3 38 Do Not Disturb  DND  Override  4 5 2 Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb  KX T7436   KX T7235 only     User Manual 173    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 38 Do Not Disturb  DND  Override    You can override the  Do Not Disturb  DND   feature set on the other extension  if permitted  by System Programming beforehand     If you make an intercom call and hear the Do Not Disturb  DND  tone     Over   ce  a    Press Over  S2   Wait for an  answer and talk    lt PT Display Example gt   LOL  DND             PT and SLT    If you hear Do Not Disturb  DND  tone after making an intercom ca
254. s to  number  if required  the second display automatically     4  To call back  go off hook and then press the  CALL  S1  button     Conditions       Ifa Direct In Lines  DIL  1   1 call is forwarded by Call Forwarding  the data will be logged  at both the forwarding and forwarded extension     e You can lock the display so that incoming call information is not shown on the display   e Ifyou modify the displayed telephone number  the new number will be memorized        With the KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can set or cancel overwriting the call  log using the display operation     Programming Guide References      100  Flexible Numbering      406  Caller ID Assignment      417  Outside Line Name Assignment    User Manual References  e 2 2 1 Initial Settings  e 4 5 4 Call Log Lock  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235   KX T7230 only   e 45 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu       4 5 12 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access  Menu    320 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 5 4 Call Log Lock  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235    KX T7230 only     Allows you to lock the display of your extension so that the  Call Log  Incoming  feature is  not shown on the display  if you do not want others to see the information     Locking  7230   7235   7433   7436    same code       gt    5     lock code lock code    Lift the handset or press Dial 57  Enter the 3 digit lock code Confirmat
255. seseeeneeaes 52  2 2 3 Phantom Extension Ringing On Off Set 0 0    ccc ccceescceseceeeeeeeseeescecsecnseeesaeeeeeseneenes 54  2 2 4 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons         ccccccccsceseceseceneeseeceeeeseeesecesecsteeeeeeeeeses 55  2 2 5 Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls        ccccceecccesceseeseeceseeeseeeeseessecsseceeenseeees 56  2 2 6 Self Extension Number Confirmation           ccccccecsseesecesteeseceeeceseeesceeseeesaecsseseeeeneeees 57  2 2 7 Station Programming Data Default Set oo    ccc ceccceeseceseceseeeeeceseeeseecsecesaecsseneeeseneenes 58  2 2 8 Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment  KX T7235 KX T743 1 K X T7433   K X22E743 6 Only EE E these tea ls Sete eee Sees ed set a reac cence A 59  3 User Programming  3 1 User Programming Instructions         eessoossoessoessesssesssesssesssessecssoesoossooossossoossoosssesssesseee 68  3 1 1 General Programming Instructions 0 0 00    ccccceecceseceseeeseeeseceeecseceseceseeseeeseeeeseeeeeesaes 68  3 1 2 Programming Methods         c ccccscccsccsssceseeeeeeeeeesecesceeseceeceeeeeseeesecsaeceaeseeeenseseeeenseessees 72  3 2  User  Programming s sciscsccccccccccvasessisconstsesuasvendececdesssdesevsectccesecsssesvedsvncvessseswasccusveccaseesse 74  3 2 1  000  Date and Time Sete    cece cccccccscceesscesssecesseccssecesssceessecesseccssesessesesseceeseeeeees 74  3 2 2  001  System Speed Dialing Number Set          ccccccccessceseeeseeeseceneeeseneeceeeeeseeeeeeeaaes 77  3 2 3  002  System Speed Dialing 
256. shown on the lower line of the  display  If the SHIFT button indicator is on  two functions are available for each Soft button   To alternate between the two functions  press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display     68 User Manual    User Programming          Using the Overlay    A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory  This overlay should be  used at all times in the programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change  during programming     Location of Controls with the Overlay    The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX T7433  KX T7436  KX T7230  and KX T7235 in the programming mode  KX T7431 is the same as KX T7433 except for the  Soft and SHIFT buttons     User Manual 69    User Programming          KX T7431                   SELECT    MODE                KX T7433                      Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3     D     D     a     SHIFT                me            me            me                            C PI J  C      PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR                                  SECRET          J J J  so STORE  LJL  a e e FLASHIRCL SELECT  4 5      m wy ave  7 8  OPER    JLo JLE   PREV END NEXT                                              KX T7230                         PROGRAM Soft 1    Soft 2    Soft 3                                                 1a J       SECRET            PAUSE CLEAR         a    ac a                                                                      1 ABC 2    peEF 3  GHI 4   
257. side callers assistance  such as listing the  extension numbers in the system  The pre assigned DISA user code may be necessary  depending on the mode to have direct access to the features within the system     Warning for the Direct Inward System Access Users    When you enable the Outside   Outside Line Call feature of Direct Inward System Access   DISA  function  if a third party discovers the password  a DISA User Code  of the system   you have a risk that they will make illegal phone calls using your telephone line  and the cost  may be charged to your account     In order to avoid this problem  we strongly recommend the following points     1  Carefully maintain the secrecy of the password     2  Specify a complicated password as long and random as you can make it     3  Change the password frequently     Calling an extension    From Outside Telephone  In Non Security Mode     DISA phone no     Dial the DISA  phone number        Ringback tone    In All Security Mode     DISA phone no     Dial the DISA  phone number        h    Ringback tone    h    J    Ringback tone    extension no     Dial the  extension number     h    n   9    Dial the  extension number     ly    DISA outgoing  message    Ringback tone    e You can dial the DISA AA Automated  Attendant  number instead     h     DISA outgoing  message         DISA user code         Enter the pre assigned  DISA user code     Dial tone    e You can dial the DISA AA Automated    Attendant  number instead                
258. splay gt   lt PT Display Example gt     To change the current entry  press  CLEAR and enter the new year              000 DATE   TIMI  01 Jan  1 MON                            SELECT   gt  SELECT    oO  day    Keep pressing SELECT until Press  gt   Enter the day  the desired month is displayed   01 through 31               Keep pressing SELECT until  the desired day of the week is  displayed        To change the current entry  press  CLEAR and enter the new day      lt Time Setting gt     NEXT  fo   hour minute    Enter the minute   00 through 59                  Press STORE  Press NEXT  Enter the hour   00 through 12       lt PT Display Example gt     To change the current entry  e To change the current entry   12 00 AM 12 press CLEAR and enter the press CLEAR and enter the    new minute              new hour        a gt  SELECT ap SELECT     E   4  oa      oa    a  C       Press  gt   Press SELECT for Press  gt   Press SELECT for Press STORE  Press END     AM or PM  12 or 24  hour  format         User Manual 75    User Programming          Conditions     After changing an entry  you can press STORE  You do not have to perform the rest of the  steps     To return to the previous field  press     in steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 18      Ifyou hear an alarm after pressing STORE  check that the date is valid      The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed   e You cannot leave an entry empty     Features Guide References  Display  in Idle    76 User 
259. ss the features which are displayed in alphabetical order   To access the features  you may shift the display to the Jog Dial Operation display by pressing  the MODE or SHIFT button first  Then follow the procedures below   To access the features while receiving a call  e g   ringing  being paged   press the INTERCOM    button first  Then follow the procedures below     Third Display    Fifth Display    WED Jan 1 03 00P    Feature Access    co Co       STA EXT FEAT                                              1     gt BSY Ovr DNY 1 0  ABST MSG On 1 9    A Co  MENU SEL  If a parameter is required  m    the feature name and z  parameter will flash        Enter a parameter   if required     o00 Z N    0o00  oOo  oO     gt BSY Ovr DNY 1 0  C Pickup co  MENU SEL      El SER            If a parameter is required   the feature name and  parameter will flash     Enter a parameter   if required     ooo  0o00  oOo  oO    346    Extension STA Speed  Features SYS Speed  Co  Call Log    Third Display    WED Jan 1 03 00P       u                                        STA EXT FEAT    Timed Reminder   Walking COS     codetext   Absent MSG Off   Absent MSG On  31 9    Busy Ovrd Deny  1 0     UO000          Busy Ovrd Deny   C Pickup CO     C Pickup Deny   C Pickup Direct    UO000    C Pickup Group  MENU         If a parameter is required  fim    the parameter will flash                Enter a parameter   if required     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           KX T7431 
260. ssscsssssssscssssssessssssscssscssssesssssesssesssscssscssscesssssee sees 361  5 3 1    Direct Station  Dialing icer e E E E E aS 361  5 3 2 One Touch Dialing         c ee cecccecscesceesseeseceseceseeeneeseeceseecsaecseceseeseeeseeessensecesseneeseeeeaes 362  5 3 3 One Touch Access for System Features           ccccesccsscessseeseeeseeseeeeseeesseesecseeseessaeenes 363  53A H Call Tranister ssc cases n cetac uence eve a e e a e E a stay gov S E 364  5 3 5 ANSWER and RELEASE Buttons Operation  KX T7441 only    0 0    ceeecceseeees 365  6 APPENDIX  Gib APPEND siwscsesaictsndesscked as tisntecacauvevash buses TE T  368  6 14        Display Exampless 2  8 ic tesiei aie iittala eae 368  6 1 2  Feature Number List ts 0  03 c ctt cores tectieeecencehende  E atone E i a TE dace 375  6 13 Tone LISts ceessapees centensdeshaes eaa ETE A E TE E E bauer 379  OLA    Troubleshooting eai ieh EEE EE E E A EE E a Eei 381  Ti AMOR EE ET E E IER R     User Manual    DPT Overview          Section I    DPT Overview    Note  All illustrations used in the initial setting are  based on model KX T7235     User Manual 13    DPT Overview          1 1 Configuration    1 1 1 Configuration    Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephones  DPTs  are available to utilize various features of the  KX TD816 and KX TD1232 System  in addition to supporting basic telephone services   making and receiving calls     There are nine DPT models     KX T7400 Series                                                            
261. t    Self Extension Number Confirmation    Live Call Screening Mode Set                                                                                   L  8 1    Initial Display Selection   8 2    Bilingual Display Selection   9  Handset   Headset Selection   0   1   Remote Station Lock Control       see  Operator   Manager Service Features   Section 4 4   0   2      Call Log Lock Control  Incoming       see  Operator   Manager Service Features   Section 4 4   0   3  Live Call Screening Password Control        see  Operator   Manager Service Features   Section 4 4      Station Programming Data Default Set          Station Speed Dialing Number   Name Assignment                    PROGRAM    Exit                 t  Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic  Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100      User Manual 49    Station Programming          2 2 Station Programming    2 2 1 Initial Settings    The original setting are shown in bold letters in the shaded boxes  Find and mark your desired  selections for programming         Be sure that you are in the Station Programming mode   Press  PROGRAM   9   9      To continue    AUTO DIAL  programming input fo    The STORE indicator lights     STORE   The display shows the initial  programming mode              Follow programming input  Press STORE     Selection Programming Input    No line LJ J  Pref
262. t    User Manual 341    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           KX T7431    System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing Extension Dialing    Second Display Third Display Fourth Display                                                                             o   SH    a li                System Speed Dialing   Station Speed Note   Dialing   Extension Dialing e You can lift the handset or press the SP    1  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is PHONE button instead of the SELECT button   displayed  e Press the MODE button to return to the initial   2  Press the SELECT button or go off hook  display     e For System Speed Dialing and Extension  Dialing  before rotating the Jog Dial  you can  press the corresponding alphabet key to select  the desired letter    lt Example gt  Press 2 twice to display  B  items     342 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           KX T7433    Third Display          l System Speed Dialing        Station Speed Dialing      Extension Dialing   P                                   gt Adam   gt Bob Jones la  Alice Carol A   MENU CALL MENU CALL or e Q                                                                  dm       On    Bob Jones                                  G  Carol  ME a CALL or ON  dim  System Speed Dialing Note  1  Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired item is at   For System Speed Dialing and Extension  the arrow  Dialing  before rotating the Jog Dial  you can    press the corresponding alphabet k
263. t   Unscreened Call Transfer  The line is released after transferring the call without    confirmation     Screened Call Transfer to Extension    PT and SLT    During a conversation     For PT    ie  jig oni   extension no   or              TRANSFER          For PT  Press TRANSFER  Confirmation Dial the destination Ringback    For SLT  Flash the hookswitch  tone and extension number  tone  dial tone    e The other party is placed on hold     Unscreened Call Transfer to Extension  PT and SLT  During a conversation       TRANSFER  For PT th    fo   AL    yY For SLT   wy  extension no     A          For PT  Press TRANSFER  Confirmation Dial the destination    For SLT  Flash the hookswitch  tone and extension number     dial tone    e The other party is placed on hold     e Ringing starts at the destination extension     142          co  ca g  Ebda    Wait for Announce  Hang up or press  an answer  SP PHONE   MONITOR     e The call is transferred     h  D     dui g    Gl    Ringback Hang up or press  tone SP PHONE MONITOR        The call is transferred     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Call Transfer using a DSS button    Allows PT users to perform Screened or Unscreened Call Transfer by using a DSS button   There are two operations  depending on whether or not One Touch Transfer     is set     When  One Touch Transfer  mode is enabled     During a conversation    DSS     Press DSS  flexible button        The other party is placed on hold and the
264. t other users cannot make outgoing outside calls from    your extension     Locking  Any Telephone    C     gt    lock code    Lift the handset or press Dial 77     SP PHONE MONITOR     Unlocking  Any Telephone      MEN    Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     Dial 77     Conditions    same code  t 4         lock code             Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR     Enter a 3 digit lock code   000 through 999  twice      lt PT Display Example gt        Log Locked   xxx  eee             D     y  cbs    Enter the same lock code Confirmation tone Hang up or press  you used to lock the and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR   extension      lt PT Display Example gt        Unlocked                How does this feature restrict the extension   This feature restricts the extension from making an outside call only  Other operations are    not affected      Remote Station Lock    Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout  If the Manager or an  Operator sets Remote Station Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the  extension user  the extension user cannot unlock it      lt PT gt        Ifsomeone tries to make an outgoing outside call from a locked extension  he or she  hears a reorder tone and  Restricted  is shown on the display       With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     180    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT     
265. t turns off        292 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Recording a message    OGM Record 1 4    SELECT MODE    Co    Press MODE until Rotate Jog Dial until Press SELECT    Feature Access  is  OGM Record  is  displayed  displayed         d  2 AUTO DIAL  a io    STORE    Enter OGM number Confirmation tone Record a message  Press STORE or wait until a   1 through 4   maximum recording time  has elapsed      lt PT Display Example gt     The recording is stopped and STORE   indicator light turns steady red    OGM 2 Rec  00 e The recorded message will be played    Time counter back automatically      seconds  ee ee a  OGM number isplay Example   selected OGM 2 Play 28   1 through 4                                The STORE indicator light flashes red slowly   Recording starts after the confirmation tone     AUTO DIAL 1 A       m Glia    Confirmation tone Press STORE or wait until Confirmation tone Hang up or press  playback is finished  SP PHONE     e The STORE indicator light turns off        User Manual 293    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Recording a message    Press SHIFT until    Rotate Jog Dial until     gt OGM Record 1 4  Page Deny 1 0  MENU SEL  co coo FO A    Press SEL      FEAT  is  OGM Record    is at the    displayed  arrow     Enter OGM number   1 through 4      Confirmation tone     lt PT Display Example gt           OGM 2 Rec  00     __ Time counter   seconds   OGM number  selected    1 through 4                    
266. tion Override for System Speed Dialing  4 5 8 KX T7235 Display Features   Call Directory  4 5 11 KX T7431  KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   Call Directory    264 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 81 Timed Reminder    Allows you to set your extension to sound an alarm once or daily at a preset time    Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a reminder  When this  feature is set  an alarm tone will ring for 30 seconds  default  at the programmed time   Wake Up Call   Ifa voice message is recorded beforehand  wake up message is heard instead of an alarm tone  when an extension user goes off hook     This feature can be activated only once or everyday at a specified time     Setting  PT and SLT    EATEN    Lift the handset or press Dial 761  Enter the hour Enter the minute  SP PHONE MONITOR   01 through 12    00 through 59      h    mat eea  o 8     For AM  Dial 0  For a one time alarm      Dial 0  Confirmation Hang up or press  For PM  Dial 1  For a daily alarm    Dial 1  tone and SP PHONE MONITOR   dial tone       An alarm will be heard at the preset time and then the setting is cleared      An alarm will be heard daily at the preset time until the setting is changed or canceled        Canceling    PT and SLT       gt   Clete    Lift the handset or press Dial 760  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt        Alarm Cancelled       
267. tions    e With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using the display operation     User Manual References  4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    User Manual 239    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 68 Paging and Transfer    You can transfer a call after making a paging announcement via Paging     All  Paging      External  or Paging     Group     Using Paging     All  PT and SLT    eee en CECI     Y or M  j a  ey er Crea    2    For PT  Press TRANSFER  Dial tone Dial 32 Xor 33    Confirmation tone Announce   For SLT  Flash the hookswitch   optional           e The other party is placed on  consultation hold        fo 3   a   A ARN     Wait for an answer  Confirmation tone Hang up or press SP PHONE MONITOR    optional     e The held party and the paged extension are  connected and can start a conversation        240 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Using Paging     External  to all external pagers    PT and SLT    During a conversation     For PT    y For SLT    A      TRANSFER  C          For PT  Press TRANSFER   For SLT  Flash the hookswitch     Dial tone    e The other party is placed on  consultation hold   f     D    Confirmation tone   optional     co     Wait for an answer     M  Cem   R    Dial 320  Confirmation tone Announce      optional     g  Gba    Hang up or press 
268. ton Assignment     After dialing the feature number or pressing the CO button  you will hear one of the  following tones     Dial tone   Indicates an idle outside line is accessed        COXX                is shown on the display   xx  outside line number   Busy tone   Indicates the selected outside line is busy           CO in use             is shown on the display   Reorder tone    1  Indicates the outside line you have attempted to access is not assigned        CO Not Assigned                is shown on the display   2  Indicates access to outside lines is denied        Restricted       is shown on the display           Restricted       may show on the display or if you hear a reorder tone  the call is  restricted for one of the following reasons     231    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT              The extension has been locked by the owner  Electronic Station Lockout  or the  operator   manager  Remote Station Lock Control        The extension is restricted by the account code mode   Verified   All Calls  or  Verified    Toll Restriction Override        The extension is restricted from making toll calls  Toll Restriction      Programming Guide References   103  Automatic Access Outside Line Assignment   400  Outside Line Connection Assignment   605 606  Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day   Night   614 615  Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment Day   Night for ISDN Extension   728  T1 Extension Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment     Da
269. tus  operator OnLy          cecceesceeseeeseeeeesteeeteenteeesees 287  4 4 5 Live Call Screening Password Control          cccccccccessesseesteceeeceteceeeeeeeeseeesseeeseenseeesaees 290  4 4 6 Outgoing Message  OGM          ccccesccssscesseesseeseceeceeeesecseeeeseecseecseceseeeeseseeseeeesaeesaees 291  4 4 7 Remote Station Lock Control oo    ccccecceccesseceseeeeeeeeeesceescenseceseceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseseaeees 300  4 4 8 System Working Report         ccccccceeccesscesseseseessecsseceeseeeseeeeseeesseesecaecneeseeeeneeetseeesees 301  4 4 9 Timed Reminder  Remote  Wake Up Call   0    cccccccceccccsceescecsneceeceeseeeeeeeeeesaeeteenaeens 304  4 5 Special Display Features                ccsccsssscssscccssessceccsscecssscesssssssessscssssceesssssesessssseseoes 312    User Manual 11    Table of Contents          12    4 5 1 Special Display Features 2 0 0    ccccccecssecssceseceseceseceeeeeseeeseenseceseecsecseeeeeeeseeeseeetaeeaeees 312  4 5 2 Call Forwarding   Do Not Disturb  KX T7436   KX T7235 only       cccesseesceeteees 313  4 5 3 Call Log  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235   KX T7230 only          315  4 5 4 Call Log Lock  Incoming  KX T7436   KX T7433   KX T7235   KX T7230 only     321  4 5 5 Call Log  Outgoing  KX T7436   KX T7235 only       ecceccceesceeseesceeeseenteeesseeteeneeees 323  4 5 6 Call Monitoring in Station Hunting  KX T7436   KX T7235 only     eceeseeereees 324  AS  KX T7235  Display Features sic  cect  coowss ea alis van eE a onePe cash dedi E e
270. u can forward calls to another extension when your extension is busy     Setting  7235   7436    FWD Busy  ext     FWD DND    Cl  extension no     Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press FWD Busy  F4   Enter the destination Confirmation tone  press SP PHONE  extension number  and dial tone        lt PT Display Example gt   FWD  BSY  Extxxxx    y  G ba 9 L       extension number where  the call is to be forwarded                            Hang up or press  SP PHONE    The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly     nal Lace eo     FWD DND hy  m For PT f    par  For PT  SLT    Lift the handset For PT  Press FWD DND  Enter the destination Confirmation  or press For PT  SLT  Dial 710  extension number  tone and  SP PHONE MONITOR  dial tone          e You may press the flexible button assigned as  the FWD DND button instead     g  lt PT Display Example gt   ra Raye FWD  BSY  Extxxxx    Hang up or press ae extension number where  SP PHONE MONITOR  the call is to be forwarded      The FWD DND indicator light flashes red slowly                          User Manual 117    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 11 Call Forwarding     No Answer    Your calls are forwarded to another extension when you do not answer the call within a pre   determined time     Setting  7235   7436       FWD DND  OW  FWD No ane ert  extension no     Lift the handset or Press FWD DND  Press FWD No Answer  F5   Enter the destination Confirmation tone  press SP PHONE  extension number  and
271. u to call an operator within the system  Two extensions can be assigned as Operator  1 and 2     Any Telephone       gt  Lo     230    Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        Conditions     Ifno operator is assigned  this feature is not available and you will hear a reorder tone after  dialing the feature number        The call is routed to Operator 1 first  If Operator 1 is busy  then it is routed to Operator 2   Through System Programming  it is possible to change the routing so that Operator 1 and  Operator 2 are called simultaneously when the operator is called     Programming Guide References   990  System Additional Information    User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 64 Outward Dialing  Line Access     SUMMARY    A CO line can be accessed in the following ways      lt PT users gt        Line Access  Automatic or    Dial the feature number  9      Press a Loop CO  L CO  button       Line Access  Outside Line   Outside line group  1 8    Group or    Dial the feature number  8  and an    Press a Group CO  G CO  button        Line Access  Individual Press a Single CO  S CO  button         lt SLT and ISDN telephone users gt        Line Access  Automatic Dial the feature number  9            Line Access  Outside Line  Dial the feature number  8  and an  Group outside line group number  1 8               Conditions    User Manual    The CO button assignment on your telephone can be re arranged as required  Refer to  2 2 2 Flexible But
272. ually        000  Date and Time Set        001  System Speed Dialing Number Set      002  System Speed Dialing Name Set       003  Extension Number Set       004  Extension Name Set   e  005  Flexible CO Button Assignment    ee i a eee ii a ae        006  Operator   Manager Extension Assignment       007  DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment      008  Absent Messages      009  Quick Dial Number Set       012  ISDN Extension Number Set       013  ISDN Extension Name Set         014  VM Name Set        017  DISA User Codes  To program  you need to switch your telephone to the User Programming mode   During the programming mode  your telephone is in a busy condition for outside callers   If you want to make a normal call operation  you must finish the programming mode     Default Setting    This system has default factory settings  Any required changes can be written in the   Programming Tables      Required Telephone Set  One of the following Proprietary Telephone  PT  sets with display is required for User  Programming   e Digital Proprietary Telephone  DPTs   KX T7436  KX T7433   KX T7431  KX T7235  KX T7230     Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display PT    Three soft buttons are provided just below the display of the following Digital Proprietary  Telephones  DPTs   KX T7230  KX T7235  KX T7433  KX T7436    Functions of these Soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance step by step   Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are 
273. umber  Press HOLD  END         The display shows the initial programming mode     e Enter the program access number     as follows   1 Preferred Line Assignment     Outgoing  2 Preferred Line Assignment     Incoming  3  Full One Touch Dialing Assignment  4 Intercom Alert Assignment  5 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment  6 Self Extension Number Confirmation  7 Live Call Screening Mode Set   81   Initial Display Selection   82  Bilingual Display Selection    9  Handset Headset Selection   01 Remote Station Look Control      Operator   Manager only    02 Call Log Lock Control  Incoming        Operator   Manager only    03 Live Call Screening Password Control       Operator   Manager only       Station Programming Data Default Set    e The display shows the programmed data    lt PT Display Example gt   When you press  5   the display shows     C W  Tonel      The Call Waiting tone is currently programmed to Tone 1        A programming access number is required to program confirm the function data by Station Programming     f   Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic  Voice Processing System  one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration  e g   KX TVS100               To exit the Station Programming mode  Press  PROGRAM  or lift the handset       If you wish to change the data  follow the programming procedure explained in this section     46 User Manual    Station Programming          Confirming
274. umber of asterisks     While on hook        On    Press MODE six times  Rotate Jog Dial in the desired direction      lt PT Display Example gt              Contrast       contrast level 3        7433   7436    While on hook or during a conversation       CONT       Own    Press CONT  S1   Rotate Jog Dial in the desired direction      lt PT Display Example gt   Contrast              contrast level 3                 32 User Manual    DPT Overview          When using the headset    The Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System supports the use of a headset with a proprietary  telephone  PT   When you use the headset  optional   you should switch the selection mode  first  Selection is explained in the  Handset   Headset Selection  in Station Programming     To change to the headset mode  Press   PROGRAM   9   9   9   2   STORE   PROGRAM      Changing the ringing tone of a CO button   Intercom calls    There are eight ringer frequencies available for each CO  Single CO  Group CO  Loop CO   button and INTERCOM button  If you wish to change them  refer to  Ringing Tone Selection  for CO Buttons    Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls  in Station Programming     Volume Control     Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker  Allows you to adjust the following volumes as required       Handset Receiver volume  levels 1 through 4       Headset volume  levels 1 through 4       Ringer volume  levels 0 through 3       Speaker volume  levels 1 through 12     If your digital proprietary telep
275. unplug the extension line and connect a known working phone  If the  known working phone operates properly  have the defective phone repaired by a specified  Panasonic Factory Service Center  If the known working phone does not operate properly   check the Digital Super Hybrid System and the internal extension wiring     Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as  fluorescent lamps and motors     The unit should be kept free of dust  moisture and vibration  and should not be exposed to  direct sunlight     Do not use benzine  thinner  or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet  Wipe it with a soft  cloth     Do not use any handset other than a Panasonic handset     When you ship the product    Carefully pack and send it prepaid  adequately insured and preferably in the original carton   Attach a postage paid letter  detailing the symptom  to the outside of the carton  DO NOT send  the product to the Executive or Regional Sales offices  They are NOT equipped to make  repairs     Product service    Panasonic Factory Servicenters for this product are listed in the servicenter directory  Consult  with your authorized Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions     WARNING    TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD  DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO  RAIN OR ANY TYPE OF MOISTURE     Accessory Order Information    Replacement parts and accessories are available through your local authorized parts  distributor     For ordering accessories  call to
276. ut          Conditions  e By default  all extensions in the group are in  Log In  mode        When extensions are logged out  calls directed to the above mentioned group do not come  in on their extension   However  calls directed to their individual extension  extension call  DIL 1 1  DIL 1 N  etc    still ring at their extension      lt PT gt        Log In Log Out button  The Log In   Log Out button can be assigned to a flexible CO button        With the KX T7431  KX T7433  KX T7436 or KX T7235  you can execute this feature  using a display operation    lt ISDN Telephone gt      This feature is not available for ISDN telephones     Features Guide References  Station Hunting  Ring Group  Uniform Call Distribution  UCD     User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 87 Uniform Call Distribution  UCD   4 5 9 KX T7235 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433   KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    208 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 56 Message Waiting    When the called extension or phantom extension is busy or does not answer your call  you can  leave a notification so that the called party may call you back    As a message receiver  the MESSAGE button light and an indication tone which you will hear  when going off hook let you know that a call has been received  If you receive notification   you can call back the original party with a simple operation  If required  you c
277. utside line  The line is seized     Setting    7230   7235   7433   7436    If you hear a busy tone after making a call  intercom or outside      fh  C BCK  a Wait for    g  gla the Gamp On recall     Press C  BCK  S3   Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and reorder tone SP PHONE        PT and SLT    If you hear a busy tone after making a call  intercom or outside      fr  KE    dn gy Wait for  Gad the Camp On recall     Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and reorder tone SP PHONE MONITOR         lt PT Display Example gt                 Callback Extxxxx       hea extension number       108 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Answering an intercom recall    PT and SLT    If you hear the telephone ringing     Lift the handset or press SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt           XXXX  Free      aS extension number       e You hear a ringback tone and the other extension begins to  ring automatically     Answering an outside line recall  PT and SLT    If you hear the telephone ringing              phone no           Lift the handset or press Dial tone    SP PHONE MONITOR      lt PT Display Example gt   COXX  Free    te outside line number                Canceling    nal ale ee     oy  ON    Laed    Dial 46  Confirmation tone    and dial tone    Lift the handset or press  SP PHONE MONITOR     User Manual          Dial the phone number     v  ola  Hang up or press    SP PHONE   MONITOR     109    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT   
278. ve a MESSAGE button  you will hear a special tone when  going off hook     Setting Call Forwarding destination to Voice Mail  Any Telephone    FWD DND  For PT    Lift the handset For PT  Press Dial the FWD number    or press FWD DND  FWD AIl Calls   Dial 2    SP PHONE MONITOR  For any telephone  Dial 710  FWD Busy   Dial 3   FWD No Answer   Dial 4   FWD Busy No Answer   Dial 5           e You may press the  flexible button assigned  as the FWD DND  button instead        Voice Mail extension no   Ga       Dial Voice Mail extension number  Confirmation Hang up or press  tone and SP PHONE MONITOR   dial tone     lt PT Display Example gt  e Calls directed to your extension are    FWD  All  Extxxxx automatically forwarded to your mailbox   e Callers can leave messages in your mailbox   according to the Voice Mail guidance           VM extension number       User Manual 275    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Canceling    Any Telephone    FWD DND For PT Mp      l  ec   ol       7  1    0  p abla  Lift the handset or press For PT Press FWD DND  Dial 0  Confirmation tone Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR  For any telephone Dial 710  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR           e You may press the flexible button  lt PT Display Example gt   assigned as the FWD DND button FWD DND Cancel  instead                    Listening to a stored message  You can listen to the messages stored in your mailbox easily  There are two operations to play  back messages     Using the Messa
279. word     amp  GI    Lift the handset or press Dial 799     SP PHONE MONITOR     Enter the same password  you used to set      lt PT Display Example gt        Password Cancel             Setting Live Call Screening    When the telephone is idle and on hook         In the Hands free mode      LoS   lt PT Display Example gt        Press LCS  flexible button           Live Call Screen           In the Private mode    lt PT Display Example gt     e Tf a caller ID call is received at your  extension  the display will show the caller s  telephone number     1234567          e In all other cases  the display will show   Live Call Screen                Canceling Live Call Screening    When the telephone is idle and on hook      LCS     Press LCS  flexible button         The LCS indicator light turns off     User Manual          h   pi    i   uw       D 5  Gla    Confirmation tone Hang up or press  and dial tone SP PHONE MONITOR           password          Enter the password        The LCS indicator  light turns on        201    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           202    In the Hands free mode    When callers are connected to your voice mailbox  the message recording is monitored  automatically through your extension speaker  While monitoring in the Hands free mode  the  LCS indicator light flashes green slowly        Having a conversation with a party     LCS  e The LCS indicator light turns red from flashing  green slowly     CT     Lift the handset Press LCS e In Keep 
280. xtension Group no   1 8       all     Waiting calls  000 255    Total Arrived 00020      Total of received calls  00000 65535    Total Answered 00010      Total of answered calls  00000 65535    Total Overflow 00002  F   Total of transferred calls  00000 65535    Total Lost 00002  F   Total of disconnected waiting calls  00000 65535    MENU CLR    Clearing the number of calls    7235   7436   lt PT Display Example gt     Group 2 Waiting 002  Total Arrived 00002    Total Answered 00000  Clear Total Call OK   Total Overflow 00000    Total Lost  MENU CLR    Press    CLR     Press    YES           Conditions  e When receiving a call  the monitoring display also remains with the flashing CO button and  ringing   e When entering   for all  total calls of all groups is displayed     e When the night mode is switched to the day mode   Total Call  can be cleared automatically  by programming  For more details  consult your manager or dealer     e  1 For more details about these groups  consult your manager or dealer     User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           e  2 When set by System Programming   MNTR Wwill be displayed  For more details  consult  your manager or dealer     Helpful hints    e To return to the initial display  press the MENU  S1  button or go off hook and on   hook       To go to the next previous group number  rotate the Jog Dial or press the UP DOWN  button instead of entering the group number  In this case  all group number  X  is not  displ
281. y     318 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           KX T7436   KX T7235    Second Display                                                                            WED Jan  1 03 00P CO  m To return to  SHIFT   hone SHIFT  co Extension STA Speed   the initial co  Features SYS Speed E      Call Log cm display Once  KX T7235  OLD7 NEWS Twice  KX T7436  dh CAG  mm  To see the confirmed To see the unconfirmed  information information  C1  co02 AB COMPANY outside line number name      0102030405 caller s telephone number  co Bob Jones caller s name    O   oct30 09 03PM date and time      SEQ01 2 Calls sequence number  01 30    MENU CLR number of times called  f  15 times max    ra N  To modify the  phone number  To see the  press  x  to erase other caller s  and  0 through 9 information  to add numbers  from the first digit   L J  To call back  go off hook   ON  r   C002 AB COMPANY    co 0102030405 co    Bob Jones C4   mn  Oct30 09 03PM m   cq SEQO1 2 Calls    CALL  LES  User Manual 319    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Operating sequence Note  1  Press the SHIFT button  To delete the displayed number  press the CLR  2  Press the OLD  S1  or NEW  S2  button to see  82  button      the confirmed or unconfirmed information  The PREV  S3  button appears by pressing the    3  Press the NEXT   3  or PREV  S3  button to SHIFT button while confirming   see other caller   s information  Or modify the   When a new call is logged  the display change
282. y   729  T1 Extension Outgoing Permitted Outside Line Assignment     Night          Features Guide References  Toll Restriction    User Manual References  2 2 2 Flexible Button Assignment  4 3 2 Account Code Entry  4 3 43 Executive Busy Override     Outside Line  PT only   4 4 7 Remote Station Lock Control    Line Access  Automatic  Allows you to select an available outside line automatically     Any Telephone     CO   L  For PT lip       R j  t Q   9   For any telephone    Lift the handset or press For PT  Press CO assigned Dial tone Dial the phone number     SP PHONE MONITOR  as Loop CO   For any telephone  Dial 9     y  G Wa e The selected CO indicator e The display shows the phone number   light turns green     Hang up or press  SP PHONE MONITOR        232 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Conditions  e You may press the L CO button directly without first going off hook     Line Access  Individual  PT only     You can get an idle outside line for making a call by simply pressing a CO button  Single CO   directly     2 ds    Lift the handset Press CO assigned Dialtone Dialthe phone number  Talk  Hang up or press    or press as single CO  SP PHONE MONITOR   SP PHONE MONITOR     e The CO indicator light turns green  e The display shows the phone number        Conditions  e You may press the CO button directly without first going off hook     Line Access  Outside Line Group    Allows you to select an idle outside line within a designated trunk g
283. y Features   System Feature Access Menu  4 5 12 KX T7431 KX T7433  KX T7436 Display Features   System Feature Access Menu    100 User Manual    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           4 3 2 Account Code Entry    An Account Code is used to identify outside calls for accounting and billing purposes  The  account code is appended to the  Station Message Detail Recording  SMDR   call record  For  incoming outside calls  account code are not required  For outgoing outside calls  you may be  required to enter an account code     Your Account Code Entry mode is set to one of the following three modes by System  Programming     In  Verified   All Calls  mode     You must always enter a system registered account code to make an outside call   In  Verified   Toll Restriction Override  mode    e You can override the Toll Restriction imposed on your extension by entering a  system registered account code before making an outside call  Toll Restriction  Override by Account Code Entry      In  Option  mode  e You may enter any account code   One mode is selected for each extension on a  Class of Service   basis          Class of Service  COS  is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions  For more details  please cousult  with your dealer     User Manual 101    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Entering account codes before dialing  7230   7235   7433   7436  Ij  S fit  2 Gow    Off hook  Press ACCNT  S3   Dial tone 3  Enter an account
284. y hears your voice over the built in  speaker of PT and can speak in the hands free mode     Alternating  to Voice Calling mode   7230   7235   7433   7436    If the extension you are calling is in Ring Calling mode   you hear a ringback tone     hy    Voice Die   S2  53     Press Voice  S3   Confirmation  tone    e Voice Calling mode is established     Any Telephone  If the extension you are calling is in Ring Calling mode  you hear a ringback mode     h    Confirmation  tone    e Voice Calling mode is established        Alternating  to Ring Calling mode   7230   7235   7433   7436    If the extension you are calling is in Voice Calling mode  you hear a  confirmation tone     Tone     S2     Press Tone  S2   Ringback tone    e Ring Calling mode is established        User Manual 105    Station Features and Operation  DPT SLT           Alternating  to Ring Calling mode   Any Telephone    If the extension you are calling is in Voice Calling mode  you hear a confirmation     h    Ringback tone    e Ring Calling mode is established        Conditions      Voice signaling is not available in the following cases       if the other extension is an SLT       if the other extension is busy on another call       if another call is ringing on the other extension     e One time switching  You can switch the desired calling mode only once during a call        Ifthe party you are calling is using a single line telephone  SLT   only Ring Calling mode  is available      lt PT gt     e Mode Se
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
¡atención! - Fujitsu manual server  Neon_downloads_files/NE-1 User Manual 1.0  Chamberlain 50HERK User's Manual  LG LW2412ER Energy Guide  Philips 37PF7320/93 User's Manual  User Manual - M100/M105 - Epson America, Inc.  Le réseau national des centres de ressources Politique de la ville    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file